diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json b/docs/evs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json index 1de7f759..3851cc08 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json +++ b/docs/evs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json @@ -1,1221 +1,3524 @@ [ + { + "dockw":"User Guide" + }, { "uri":"evs_01_0119.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0119.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"1", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0014580741.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0014580741.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"2", "des":"Elastic Volume Service (EVS) offers scalable block storage for cloud servers. With high reliability, high performance, and a variety of specifications, EVS disks can be u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Is EVS?,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Is EVS?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0014580744.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0014580744.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"3", "des":"EVS disks are classified based on the disk I/O performance. EVS disks differ in performance and price. Choose the disk type most appropriate for your applications.Common ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Disk Types and Performance,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Disk Types and Performance", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0052554220.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0052554220.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"4", "des":"There are two EVS device types: Virtual Block Device (VBD) and Small Computer System Interface (SCSI).VBD is the default EVS device type. VBD EVS disks support only basic", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Device Types and Usage Instructions,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Device Types and Usage Instructions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0032860759.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0032860759.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"5", "des":"Shared EVS disks are block storage devices that support concurrent read/write operations and can be attached to multiple servers. Shared EVS disks feature multiple attach", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Shared EVS Disks and Usage Instructions,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Shared EVS Disks and Usage Instructions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0001.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0001.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"6", "des":"In case your services require encryption for the data stored on EVS disks, EVS provides you with the encryption function. You can encrypt newly created EVS disks.EVS uses", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Encryption,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Encryption", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0021.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0021.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"7", "des":"Cloud Disk Backup provided by Cloud Backup and Recovery (CBR) allows you to create backups for your EVS disks while servers are running. If data loss or damage occurred d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Backup,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Backup", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0066809008.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0066809008.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"8", - "des":"EVS allows you to create snapshots for disks on the management console or by making API calls. An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific ", + "des":"An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific point in time. Snapshots can be used as a disaster recovery (DR) approach, and you can use snap", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Snapshot,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Snapshot", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0048.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0048.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"9", "des":"Both EVS backups and EVS snapshots provide redundancies for improved disk data reliability. Table 1 lists the differences between them.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Differences Between EVS Backups and EVS Snapshots,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Differences Between EVS Backups and EVS Snapshots", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0020.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0020.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"10", "des":"If your services or disk data demands high reliability, you can use the cross-AZ replication feature provided by EVS. You can create a disaster recovery (DR) disk for a p", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Replication (Deprecated),Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Replication (Deprecated)", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0086.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0056.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0056.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"11", + "des":"The backend storage system of EVS employs three-copy redundancy to guarantee data reliability. With this mechanism, one piece of data is by default divided into multiple ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"EVS Three-Copy Redundancy,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"EVS Three-Copy Redundancy", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0086.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0086.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"12", "des":"If you need to assign different permissions to employees in your enterprise to access your EVS resources, IAM is a good choice for fine-grained permissions management. IA", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Permissions Management,Overview,User Guide", - "title":"Permissions Management", + "kw":"Permissions,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Permissions", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0085.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0085.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"13", + "des":"This section describes the constraints on using EVS.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Constraints,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Constraints", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0106.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0106.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"12", - "des":"Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.Relationships between EVS and other servicesECS: EVS disks can be attached to ECSs and used as scalable bl", + "code":"14", + "des":"Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.Relationships between EVS and other services", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS and Other Services,Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS and Other Services", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0101.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0101.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"13", + "code":"15", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Basic Concepts", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Basic Concepts", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0097.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0102.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0102.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"14", + "code":"16", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"EVS Concepts,Basic Concepts,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"EVS Concepts", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0097.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0097.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"17", "des":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center, which", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Region and AZ,Basic Concepts,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Region and AZ", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0120.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0120.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"15", + "code":"18", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Getting Started", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Getting Started", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0057.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0057.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"16", - "des":"Figure 1 shows the basic EVS operation procedure.Basic operation procedure", + "code":"19", + "des":"Figure 1 shows the EVS process overview.Process overviewEVS disks can be attached to servers and be used as system disks or data disks. For details, see Table 1.Method of", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Basic Operation Procedure,Getting Started,User Guide", - "title":"Basic Operation Procedure", + "kw":"Process Overview,Getting Started,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Process Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0021738346.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0021738346.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"17", - "des":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers.System disks can only be created together with servers and are automatically attached.A system disk can ha", + "code":"20", + "des":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers. You can create data disks on the EVS console, or create them together with system disks on the ECS consol", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Create an EVS Disk,Getting Started,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Create an EVS Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0107.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0107.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"18", + "code":"21", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Attach an EVS Disk", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Attach an EVS Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0036.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0036.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"19", - "des":"Independently created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this ", + "code":"22", + "des":"Separately created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this cas", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Attaching a Non-Shared Disk,Attach an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Attaching a Non-Shared Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0037.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0037.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"20", - "des":"Independently created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this ", + "code":"23", + "des":"Separately created shared EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such a disk is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Attaching a Shared Disk,Attach an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Attaching a Shared Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0058.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0058.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"21", + "code":"24", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Initialize an EVS Data Disk", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Initialize an EVS Data Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0038.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0038.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"22", + "code":"25", "des":"After a disk is attached to a server, you need to log in to the server to initialize the disk, that is, format the disk. You must initialize a disk before accessing it.Sy", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles,Initialize an EVS Data Disk,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0108.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0108.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"23", + "code":"26", "des":"This section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Windows.The maximum disk capacity support", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2008),Initialize an EVS Data Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2008)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0045.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0045.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"24", + "code":"27", "des":"This section uses Windows Server 2019 Standard 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Windows.The maximum disk capacity supported by", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2019),Initialize an EVS Data Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2019)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0033.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0033.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"25", + "code":"28", "des":"This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use fdisk to partition the data disk.The maximum parti", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (fdisk),Initialize an EVS Data Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (fdisk)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0034.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0034.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"26", + "code":"29", "des":"This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use parted to partition the data disk.The maximum part", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (parted),Initialize an EVS Data Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (parted)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0087.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0087.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"27", + "code":"30", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Permissions Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0089.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0089.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"28", - "des":"This chapter describes how to use IAM to implement fine-grained permissions control for your EVS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users for employees based on your", + "code":"31", + "des":"You can use IAM for fine-grained permissions control for your EVS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users for workforce based on your enterprise's organizational st", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a User and Granting EVS Permissions,Permissions Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Creating a User and Granting EVS Permissions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0090.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0090.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"29", - "des":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system-defined policies of EVS. For the actions supported for custom policies, see section \"Permissions Policies and Supp", + "code":"32", + "des":"You can create custom policies to supplement the system-defined policies of EVS. For the actions supported for custom policies, see section \"Permissions Policies and Supp", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Custom Policies,Permissions Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Custom Policies", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0059.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0201.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0201.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"30", + "code":"33", + "des":"Figure 1 shows the basic EVS operation process.Process overviewEVS disks can be attached to servers and be used as system disks or data disks. For details, see Table 1.Me", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Creating and Using an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Creating and Using an EVS Disk", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0073.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0073.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"34", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Attaching an Existing Disk", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Attaching an Existing Disk", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0074.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0074.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"35", + "des":"This section describes how to attach an existing system disk.System disks can only be attached offline, which means that the server must be in the Stopped state.You can v", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Attaching an Existing System Disk,Attaching an Existing Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Attaching an Existing System Disk", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0075.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0075.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"36", + "des":"This section describes how to attach an existing non-shared disk to a server and use it as a data disk. A non-shared disk can be attached to one server only.You can view ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Attaching an Existing Non-Shared Disk,Attaching an Existing Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Attaching an Existing Non-Shared Disk", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0076.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0076.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"37", + "des":"This section describes how to attach an existing shared disk to a server and use it as a data disk.You can view the disk information in the disk list. A shared disk can b", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Attaching an Existing Shared Disk,Attaching an Existing Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Attaching an Existing Shared Disk", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0093.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0093.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"38", + "des":"This section describes how to view disk details, including the disk status and specifications. You can view disk details:From the EVS ConsoleFrom the Cloud Server Console", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Viewing EVS Disk Details,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Viewing EVS Disk Details", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0059.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0059.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"39", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Disk Capacity Expansion", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Disk Capacity Expansion", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0006.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0006.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"31", - "des":"If the capacity of an existing disk is insufficient, you can expand the disk capacity to increase the storage space.Both system disks and data disks can be expanded. Disk", + "code":"40", + "des":"If the capacity of an existing disk is insufficient, you can expand the disk capacity to increase the storage space.Both system disks and data disks can be expanded. A sy", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Expansion Overview,Disk Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Expansion Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0007.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0007.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"32", + "code":"41", "des":"This section describes how to expand the capacity of an In-use EVS disk on the management console. The In-use status indicates that the disk has been attached to a server", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk,Disk Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0008.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0008.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"33", + "code":"42", "des":"This section describes how to expand the capacity of an Available EVS disk on the management console. The Available status indicates that the disk has not been attached t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk,Disk Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0017616396.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0017616396.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"34", - "des":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the ad", + "code":"43", + "des":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the addition", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2008),Disk Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2008)", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0094.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0126.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0126.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"35", + "code":"44", + "des":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the addition", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2016),Disk Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2016)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0094.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0094.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"45", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Linux)", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Linux)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0035.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0035.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"36", + "code":"46", "des":"Before extending the disk partition and file system, you must check the disk partition style and file system format, and then select the appropriate operation accordingly", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Partition and File System Extension Preparations (Linux),Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Partition and File System Extension Preparations (Linux)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0072.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0072.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"37", - "des":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "code":"47", + "des":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for System Disks (Linux),Extending Disk Partitions and File Sy", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for System Disks (Linux)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0109.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0109.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"38", - "des":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "code":"48", + "des":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for Data Disks (Linux),Extending Disk Partitions and File Syst", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for Data Disks (Linux)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0018.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0018.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"39", - "des":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "code":"49", + "des":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for SCSI Disks (Linux),Extending Disk Partitions and File Syst", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for SCSI Disks (Linux)", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0002.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0002.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"40", + "code":"50", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Detaching an EVS Disk", - "title":"Detaching an EVS Disk", + "kw":"Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0003.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0003.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"41", - "des":"A system disk can only be detached offline, that is, its server must be in the Stopped state before the system disk is detached. Therefore, you need to first stop the ser", + "code":"51", + "des":"If the file system on your system disk is damaged and your server cannot be started, you can detach the system disk and attach it to another server as a data disk. After ", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Detaching a System Disk,Detaching an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "kw":"Detaching a System Disk,Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Detaching a System Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0004.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0004.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"42", - "des":"Data disks can be detached online or offline, which means that the server containing the to-be-detached data disk can either be in the Running or Stopped state.ECSDetach ", + "code":"52", + "des":"If you want to use a data disk on another server in the same region and AZ, you can detach the data disk and then attach it to that server.If a data disk is no longer req", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Detaching a Data Disk,Detaching an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "kw":"Detaching a Data Disk,Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Detaching a Data Disk", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0005.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0005.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"43", - "des":"If an EVS disk is no longer used, you can release the virtual resources by deleting the disk from the system.Before deleting a disk, ensure that the disk status is Availa", + "code":"53", + "des":"If an EVS disk is no longer used, you can release the virtual resources by deleting it.The disk status is Available, Error, Expansion failed, Restoration failed, or Rollb", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Deleting EVS Disks,User Guide", + "kw":"Deleting EVS Disks,Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Deleting EVS Disks", "githuburl":"" }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0009.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"44", - "des":"The encryption function can be used to encrypt system disks, data disks, backups and snapshots. The details are as follows:System disk encryption relies on the image that", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks,User Guide", - "title":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0010.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"45", - "des":"You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach the shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.S", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Managing Shared EVS Disks,User Guide", - "title":"Managing Shared EVS Disks", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0110.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"46", - "des":"EVS backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.This section describes how to con", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Managing EVS Backups,User Guide", - "title":"Managing EVS Backups", - "githuburl":"" - }, { "uri":"evs_01_0111.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0111.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"47", + "code":"54", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing EVS Snapshots", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Managing EVS Snapshots", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0098.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0098.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"48", - "des":"EVS allows you to create snapshots for disks on the management console or by making API calls. An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific ", + "code":"55", + "des":"An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific point in time. Snapshots can be used as a disaster recovery (DR) approach, and you can use snap", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Snapshot Overview,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Snapshot Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"en-us_topic_0066615262.html", + "node_id":"en-us_topic_0066615262.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"49", - "des":"You can create an EVS snapshot on the management console to save the EVS disk data at a specific time point.A maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for one disk.Snapshots", + "code":"56", + "des":"You can create an EVS snapshot on the management console to save the EVS disk data at a specific time point.Creating snapshots does not affect the performance of the disk", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Snapshot,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Creating a Snapshot", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0011.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0011.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"50", - "des":"If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete the snapshot to release the virtual resources. Snapshot deletion has the following constraints:The snapshot status must ", + "code":"57", + "des":"If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete it to release the virtual resources.The snapshot status must be Available or Error.If a disk is deleted, all the snapsho", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Snapshot,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a Snapshot", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0012.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0122.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0122.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"51", - "des":"If the data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back the data from a snapshot to the source disk to restore data. Snapshot rollback has the following con", + "code":"58", + "des":"This section describes how to view the details of a snapshot.The snapshot list page is displayed.On the details page, view the snapshot information, such as the snapshot ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Viewing Details of a Snapshot,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Viewing Details of a Snapshot", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0012.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0012.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"59", + "des":"If data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back data from a snapshot to the source disk.Data of a snapshot can be rolled back only to its source disk. R", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Rolling Back Data from a Snapshot,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Rolling Back Data from a Snapshot", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0013.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0013.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"52", + "code":"60", "des":"This section describes how to create an EVS disk on the Snapshots page. Besides, you can also create an EVS disk from a snapshot by specifying the Create from snapshot pa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot,Managing EVS Snapshots,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0023.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"53", - "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated)", - "title":"Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0060.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"54", - "des":"For the EVS replication concepts, see EVS Replication (Deprecated). This chapter describes the basic functions and operations of EVS replication. Figure 1 shows the opera", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"EVS Replication Operation Procedure (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"EVS Replication Operation Procedure (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0024.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"55", - "des":"Before you create an EVS replication pair, create a DR ECS in the secondary AZ for the production ECS. The DR ECS parameters must be consistent with those of the producti", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Creating a DR ECS (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Creating a DR ECS (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0026.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"56", - "des":"Before you use EVS replication, bind a virtual IP address to the production server and DR server, respectively. Then configure the virtual IP address as the static IP add", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),U", - "title":"Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0025.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"57", - "des":"This section is used to guide users to collect the production ECS and DR ECS information, including the ECS IDs and the IDs of the EVS disks attached the ECSs.Two EVS dis", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0027.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"58", - "des":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create EVS replication pairs. Each server can have multiple EVS replication pairs. For details, see EVS Replication Pair in the", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Creating an EVS Replication Pair (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Creating an EVS Replication Pair (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0028.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"59", - "des":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create replication consistency groups and add EVS replication pairs to the groups. For details, see Replication Consistency Gro", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Creating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Gui", - "title":"Creating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0029.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"60", - "des":"Currently, EVS replication pairs can be added to or removed from replication consistency groups through APIs only. For details, see Updating a Replication Consistency Gro", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Updating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Gui", - "title":"Updating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0030.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0009.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0009.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"61", - "des":"Production servers and production disks belong to the primary AZ, and DR servers and DR disks belong to the secondary AZ. Users can make API calls to perform a planned mi", + "des":"System disk encryptionSystem disks are created along with servers and cannot be created separately. So whether a system disk is encrypted or not depends on the image sele", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Planned Migration (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Planned Migration (Deprecated)", + "kw":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0031.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0010.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0010.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"62", - "des":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure, users can make API calls to perform a failover for the replication consistency", + "des":"You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach a shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.Sha", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Failover (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Failover (Deprecated)", + "kw":"Managing Shared EVS Disks,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Managing Shared EVS Disks", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0032.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0110.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0110.xml", "product_code":"evs", "code":"63", - "des":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure and a failover has been performed, enable the DR servers and disks to provide s", + "des":"EVS disk backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.You can configure a backup p", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Reprotection (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", - "title":"Reprotection (Deprecated)", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_01_0043.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"64", - "des":"Users can make an API call to expand the EVS disks in one or multiple EVS replication pairs of a replication consistency group. In such an expansion operation, two EVS di", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Expanding EVS Disks in a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprec", - "title":"Expanding EVS Disks in a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", + "kw":"Managing EVS Backups,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Managing EVS Backups", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0042.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0042.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"65", - "des":"Through EVS transfer, EVS disks can be transferred from one account to another. After the transfer succeeds, the ownerships of the EVS disks belong to the target account ", + "code":"64", + "des":"EVS transfer allows you to transfer disks from one account to another. After a transfer succeeds, the ownership of the disk belongs to the target account only.Users can u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing EVS Transfers,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Managing EVS Transfers", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0112.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0112.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"66", + "code":"65", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Managing a Tag", - "title":"Managing a Tag", + "kw":"Manage EVS Tags", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Manage EVS Tags", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0099.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0099.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"67", + "code":"66", "des":"Tags identify EVS resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Tag Overview,Managing a Tag,User Guide", + "kw":"Tag Overview,Manage EVS Tags,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Tag Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0014.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0014.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"68", - "des":"This section is used to guide users to add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.Tags are us", + "code":"67", + "des":"You can add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.A tag is composed of a key-value pair.Key:", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Adding a Tag,Managing a Tag,User Guide", + "kw":"Adding a Tag,Manage EVS Tags,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Adding a Tag", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0015.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0015.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"69", + "code":"68", "des":"You can change the value of a tag for an existing disk, but cannot change the key of a tag.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Edit Tag", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Modifying a Tag,Managing a Tag,User Guide", + "kw":"Modifying a Tag,Manage EVS Tags,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Modifying a Tag", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0016.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0016.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"70", - "des":"If an existing tag is no longer needed, you can delete it.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Delete Tag page is displayed.Return to th", + "code":"69", + "des":"If an existing tag is no longer needed, you can delete it.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Delete Tag page is displayed.The tag is d", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Deleting a Tag,Managing a Tag,User Guide", + "kw":"Deleting a Tag,Manage EVS Tags,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a Tag", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0019.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0019.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"71", + "code":"70", "des":"Tags can be used to categorize EVS disks, and users can quickly search for their desired EVS disks by tags. This section is used to guide users to search for EVS disk by ", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Searching Disks by Tags,Managing a Tag,User Guide", - "title":"Searching Disks by Tags", + "kw":"Searching for Disks by Tag,Manage EVS Tags,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Searching for Disks by Tag", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0023.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0023.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"71", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated)", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0060.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0060.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"72", + "des":"For the EVS replication concepts, see EVS Replication (Deprecated). This chapter describes the basic functions and operations of EVS replication. Figure 1 shows the opera", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"EVS Replication Operation Procedure (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"EVS Replication Operation Procedure (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0024.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0024.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"73", + "des":"Before you create an EVS replication pair, create a DR ECS in the secondary AZ for the production ECS. The DR ECS parameters must be consistent with those of the producti", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Creating a DR ECS (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Creating a DR ECS (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0026.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0026.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"74", + "des":"Before you use EVS replication, bind a virtual IP address to the production server and DR server, respectively. Then configure the virtual IP address as the static IP add", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),U", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0025.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0025.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"75", + "des":"This section is used to guide users to collect the production ECS and DR ECS information, including the ECS IDs and the IDs of the EVS disks attached the ECSs.Two EVS dis", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0027.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0027.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"76", + "des":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create EVS replication pairs. Each server can have multiple EVS replication pairs. For details, see EVS Replication Pair in the", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Creating an EVS Replication Pair (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Creating an EVS Replication Pair (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0028.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0028.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"77", + "des":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create replication consistency groups and add EVS replication pairs to the groups. For details, see Replication Consistency Gro", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Creating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Gui", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Creating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0029.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0029.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"78", + "des":"Currently, EVS replication pairs can be added to or removed from replication consistency groups through APIs only. For details, see Updating a Replication Consistency Gro", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Updating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Gui", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Updating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0030.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0030.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"79", + "des":"Production servers and production disks belong to the primary AZ, and DR servers and DR disks belong to the secondary AZ. Users can make API calls to perform a planned mi", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Planned Migration (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Planned Migration (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0031.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0031.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"80", + "des":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure, users can make API calls to perform a failover for the replication consistency", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Failover (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Failover (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0032.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0032.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"81", + "des":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure and a failover has been performed, enable the DR servers and disks to provide s", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Reprotection (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprecated),User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Reprotection (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0043.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0043.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"82", + "des":"Users can make an API call to expand the EVS disks in one or multiple EVS replication pairs of a replication consistency group. In such an expansion operation, two EVS di", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Expanding EVS Disks in a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated),Managing EVS Replication (Deprec", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Expanding EVS Disks in a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0069.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0069.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"83", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Manage EVS Quotas", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Manage EVS Quotas", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0070.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0070.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"84", + "des":"Quotas are enforced for service resources on the platform to prevent unforeseen spikes in resource usage. Quotas can limit the number or amount of resources available to ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Querying EVS Resource Quotas,Manage EVS Quotas,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Querying EVS Resource Quotas", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0071.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0071.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"85", + "des":"If any resource quota no longer meets your service requirements, you can apply for a higher quota.The system does not support online quota adjustment. If you need to adju", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Increasing EVS Resource Quotas,Manage EVS Quotas,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Increasing EVS Resource Quotas", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_2704.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_2704.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"86", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Managing EVS Monitoring Data", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Managing EVS Monitoring Data", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0044.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0044.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"72", + "code":"87", "des":"This section describes monitored metrics reported by EVS to Cloud Eye as well as their namespaces and dimensions. You can use the console or APIs provided by Cloud Eye to", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Viewing EVS Monitoring Data,User Guide", + "kw":"Viewing EVS Monitoring Data,Managing EVS Monitoring Data,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Viewing EVS Monitoring Data", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0046.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0046.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"73", + "code":"88", "des":"EVS supports the recording of EVS operations through CTS. You can query EVS traces and use them for historical operation audits and backtracks.CTS has been enabled.To vie", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Auditing,User Guide", - "title":"Auditing", + "kw":"Auditing EVS Operation Records,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Auditing EVS Operation Records", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0001.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0001.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"74", + "code":"89", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"FAQ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"FAQ", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0081.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0096.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0096.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"75", + "code":"90", + "des":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?Can EVS Disks Be Used Directly for Storage?Can EVS Disks Be Used Alone?Can I Change the AZ of My Disk?Can I Change the Disk Type", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Summary,FAQ,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Summary", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0081.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0081.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"91", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"General", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"General", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0033.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0033.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"76", - "des":"A newly purchased disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server operating system before you can use it.", + "code":"92", + "des":"A newly created disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server OS before you can use it.For more information, see Process Overview.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Purchased Disk?,General,User Guide", - "title":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Purchased Disk?", + "kw":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0065.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0065.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"77", + "code":"93", "des":"No.EVS disks must be attached to cloud servers before use. You cannot use EVS disks alone to store data.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Directly for Storage?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Directly for Storage?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0054.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0054.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"78", + "code":"94", "des":"No.EVS disks must be attached to servers before you can use them.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Alone?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Alone?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0066.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0066.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"79", + "code":"95", "des":"To do so, perform the following operations:The disk list page is displayed.View more information on the Summary tab.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I View My Disk Details?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Can I View My Disk Details?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0048.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0061.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0061.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"80", + "code":"96", + "des":"Disk names are used to identify disks. After a disk is created, you can perform operations in this section to change the disk name if needed.The disk list page is display", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I Change the Name of My Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Change the Name of My Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0048.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0048.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"97", "des":"No.The AZ of a disk cannot be changed after you have created the disk. If you want to change the AZ, delete the disk and create a new one.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Change the AZ of My Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can I Change the AZ of My Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0014.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0045.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0045.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"81", + "code":"98", + "des":"The following table describes whether the disk type, device type, sharing, and encryption attributes of a disk can be changed.However, you can:Create a backup for the dis", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Change the Disk Type, Device Type, or Sharing Attribute of My Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Change the Disk Type, Device Type, or Sharing Attribute of My Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0014.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0014.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"99", "des":"If an error occurs, the disk may show one of the states listed in the following table. Take the measures described in the table to handle the exceptions.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If an Error Occurs on My EVS Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Should I Do If an Error Occurs on My EVS Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0021.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0021.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"82", + "code":"100", "des":"EVS disks have two device types: VBD and SCSI. WWNs are used as the unique identifiers for SCSI EVS disks, and VBD EVS disks do not have WWNs.You can view the WWN of a SC", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Do Some of My EVS Disks Not Have WWN Information?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Why Do Some of My EVS Disks Not Have WWN Information?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0020.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0020.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"83", + "code":"101", "des":"If the system displays a message indicating insufficient quota during an EVS replication pair creation or a replication consistency group creation or update, contact the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If My EVS Replication Quotas Are Insufficient? (Deprecated),General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Should I Do If My EVS Replication Quotas Are Insufficient? (Deprecated)", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0084.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0059.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0059.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"84", - "des":"A system disk runs the server operating system. It is like drive C in a PC.When a server is created, a system disk is automatically created and attached. You cannot creat", + "code":"102", + "des":"Data migration involves the following scenarios:Cross-AZ data migration: Disk data can be migrated from one AZ to another through disk backups. You can create backups for", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Migrate Data from an EVS Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Migrate Data from an EVS Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0084.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0084.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"103", + "des":"A system disk runs the server OS. It is like drive C in a PC.When a server is created, a system disk is automatically created and attached. You cannot create a system dis", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between System Disks and Data Disks?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Are the Differences Between System Disks and Data Disks?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0087.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0087.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"85", + "code":"104", "des":"EVS disk data cannot be directly saved to a local PC. It is recommended that you use a third-party tool, such as FTP, to download the data.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Download My EVS Disk Data to a Local PC?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Download My EVS Disk Data to a Local PC?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0091.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0091.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"86", + "code":"105", "des":"Solution:Install the ntfsprogs software to enable Linux to access the NTFS file system.yum install ntfsprogsyum install ntfsprogsView the data disks previously attached t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Export the Original Data After I Changed My Server OS from Windows to CentOS?,General,User", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Export the Original Data After I Changed My Server OS from Windows to CentOS?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0092.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0092.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"87", + "code":"106", "des":"Table 1 lists the common disk partition styles. In Linux, different partition styles require different partitioning tools.The maximum disk size supported by MBR is 2 TiB,", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between MBR and GPT Partition Styles?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Are the Differences Between MBR and GPT Partition Styles?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0077.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0095.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0095.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"88", - "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "code":"107", + "des":"Before an EVS disk is attached, the system will call the reserveVolume EVS API to check whether the disk can be attached. If it can be attached, the system then changes t", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Capacity Expansion", - "title":"Capacity Expansion", + "kw":"What Does the \"reserveVolume\" Trace Mean in CTS?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"What Does the \"reserveVolume\" Trace Mean in CTS?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0026.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0096.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0096.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"89", - "des":"No. The disk capacity can only be expanded, and temporary capacity expansion is not supported.", + "code":"108", + "des":"EVS disks must be attached to servers before you can use them. For how to upload files, see section \"How Do I Upload Files to My ECS?\" in the Elastic Cloud Server FAQs.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", - "title":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0075.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"90", - "des":"The differences are as follows:Expanding an EVS disk is when you expand the capacity of an existing EVS disk. Some systems let you expand the capacity of EVS disks in use", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS ", - "title":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS Disk?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0044.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"91", - "des":"Data will not be deleted during a system disk or data disk capacity expansion. However, misoperations during an expansion may result in data loss or exceptions. Exercise ", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", - "title":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0042.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"92", - "des":"An EVS disk can be expanded either in the Available or In-use state. Expanding the disk capacity on the management console enlarges the disk capacity, but you still need ", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", - "title":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0028.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"93", - "des":"An expansion consists of two phases:Expand the disk capacity on the management console.A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all ", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", - "title":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0024.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"94", - "des":"An EVS system disk can be as large as 1 TiB (1,024 GiB). You can expand the capacity of a system disk to up to 1 TiB.An EVS data disk can be as large as 32 TiB (32,768 Gi", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", - "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0027.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"95", - "des":"After expanding disk capacity on the management console, you must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system for the extra capacity to become avai", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?,Capacity Expansion", - "title":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"evs_faq_0073.html", - "product_code":"evs", - "code":"96", - "des":"If no partition but only a file system is created on a data disk, extend the file system according to the following operations:Run the lsblk command. Information similar ", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?,Capacity Expansion,User Guid", - "title":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?", + "kw":"How Can I Upload Files to My EVS Disk?,General,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Upload Files to My EVS Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0078.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0078.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"97", + "code":"109", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Attachment", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Attachment", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0022.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0022.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"98", + "code":"110", "des":"Symptom: A data disk has been attached to a Linux server on the management console, but the disk cannot be viewed on the server.Run df -TH to view the disk information. C", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Can't I View the Attached Data Disk on the Server?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Why Can't I View the Attached Data Disk on the Server?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0006.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0025.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0025.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"99", + "code":"111", + "des":"My disk cannot be attached to a server.Possible causes are listed here in order of their probability.If the fault persists after you have ruled out one cause, move on to ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0006.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0006.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"112", "des":"A non-shared disk can only be attached to one server.A shared disk can be attached to up to 16 servers. Shared disks are a type of EVS disks that can be attached to multi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Attach a Disk to Multiple Servers?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can I Attach a Disk to Multiple Servers?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0036.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0036.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"100", + "code":"113", "des":"No.Disks and the servers you attach the disks to must be in the same AZ. The same is true for shared disks. Shared disks can only be attached to the servers in the same A", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Attach a Disk to a Server in Another AZ?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can I Attach a Disk to a Server in Another AZ?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0043.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0043.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"101", + "code":"114", "des":"Data disks can be created during or after the server creation. If you create data disks during the server creation, the system will automatically attach the data disks to", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Add a Data Disk to an Existing Server?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Add a Data Disk to an Existing Server?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0055.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0055.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"102", + "code":"115", "des":"Yes. Different types of EVS disks can be attached to the same server. You only need to make sure that these disks and the server are in the same AZ.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Attach Different Types of Disks to the Same Server?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can I Attach Different Types of Disks to the Same Server?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0076.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0076.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"103", + "code":"116", "des":"You are not advised to attach a Linux EVS disk to a Windows server or attach a Windows EVS disk to a Linux server.The disk information may fail to be displayed due to the", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If a Linux EVS Disk Is Attached to a Windows Server?,Attachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Should I Do If a Linux EVS Disk Is Attached to a Windows Server?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0079.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0078.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0078.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"104", + "code":"117", + "des":"This section describes how to change the function of a disk on the original server.System disk created along with a server: You can detach the system disk and then re-att", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Change the Function of a System Disk or Data Disk Created Along with a Server?,Attachment,User", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Change the Function of a System Disk or Data Disk Created Along with a Server?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0094.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0094.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"118", + "des":"You find that the device name displayed in the ECS OS is different from that displayed on the management console and you cannot determine which disk name is correct. This", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I Obtain My Disk Device Name in the ECS OS Using the Device Identifier Provided on the Consol", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Obtain My Disk Device Name in the ECS OS Using the Device Identifier Provided on the Console?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0077.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0077.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"119", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Capacity Expansion", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Capacity Expansion", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0026.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0026.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"120", + "des":"No. The disk capacity can only be expanded, and temporary capacity expansion is not supported.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0075.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0075.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"121", + "des":"The differences are as follows:Expanding an EVS disk is when you expand the capacity of an existing EVS disk. Some systems let you expand the capacity of EVS disks in use", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0044.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0044.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"122", + "des":"Data will not be deleted during a system disk or data disk capacity expansion. However, incorrect operations during an expansion may result in data loss or exceptions. Ex", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0023.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0023.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"123", + "des":"Yes. If backups or snapshots have been created for disks before capacity was expanded, you can restore your disk data from these backups or snapshots after the capacity i", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Use Backups or Snapshots Created Before Capacity Expansion to Restore Data on Expanded Disks?,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Use Backups or Snapshots Created Before Capacity Expansion to Restore Data on Expanded Disks?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0042.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0042.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"124", + "des":"An EVS disk can be expanded either in the Available or In-use state. Expanding the disk capacity on the management console enlarges the disk capacity, but you still need ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0028.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0028.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"125", + "des":"An expansion consists of two phases:Expand the disk capacity on the management console.A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0024.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0024.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"126", + "des":"An EVS system disk can be as large as 1 TiB (1,024 GiB). You can expand the capacity of a system disk to up to 1 TiB.An EVS data disk can be as large as 32 TiB (32,768 Gi", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0029.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0029.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"127", + "des":"In Windows, if you already have a D drive and want to add an E drive, refer to the following:The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (F:) and Data Disk: Ad", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to a New Partition?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to a New Partition?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0030.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0030.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"128", + "des":"In Windows, if your disk already has, for example, a D: drive and you want to add space to this volume, refer to the following:The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to an Existing Partition?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to an Existing Partition?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0027.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0027.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"129", + "des":"After expanding disk capacity on the management console, you must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system for the extra capacity to become avai", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?,Capacity Expansion", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0074.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0074.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"130", + "des":"Capacity expansion is not allowed for the disk.Possible causes are listed here in order of their probability.If the fault persists after you have ruled out one cause, mov", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Can't I Expand Capacity for My Disk?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why Can't I Expand Capacity for My Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0073.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0073.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"131", + "des":"If no partition but only a file system is created on a data disk, extend the file system according to the following operations:Run the lsblk command. Information similar ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?,Capacity Expansion,User Guid", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0082.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0082.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"132", + "des":"If the root partition of your quickly provisioned BMS is too small, extend the root partition by referring to the following procedure.This example uses CentOS 7.3 and sys", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I Extend the Root Partition of a Quickly Provisioned BMS?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Extend the Root Partition of a Quickly Provisioned BMS?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0131.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0131.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"133", + "des":"You can use either fdisk or parted to view the disk partition style.Method 1: Check Partition Style and File System Format Using fdiskMethod 2: Check Partition Style and ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I View the Disk Partition Style in Linux?,Capacity Expansion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I View the Disk Partition Style in Linux?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0079.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0079.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"134", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Detachment", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Detachment", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0012.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0012.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"105", - "des":"It depends on if the disk is encrypted or not.EncryptedCMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.Before you detach an EVS disk encrypted by a CMK, check whether the CMK i", + "code":"135", + "des":"It depends on if the disk is encrypted or not.EncryptedThe CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.The disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee for how long it", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"If I Detach a Disk, Will I Lose the Data on My Disk?,Detachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"If I Detach a Disk, Will I Lose the Data on My Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0056.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0056.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"106", + "code":"136", "des":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks, but the way you detach each one is different.System disks: A system disk can only be detached offline. You must first", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Can't I Detach My Disk?,Detachment,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Why Can't I Detach My Disk?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0082.html", + "uri":"evs_01_0083.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0083.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"107", + "code":"137", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Deletion", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Deletion", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0079.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0079.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"138", + "des":"Check whether the disk has any snapshots or backups created.If there are, use a snapshot or backup to restore the disk data to the state when the snapshot or backup was c", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Recover Data from a Disk That Was Accidentally Deleted?,Deletion,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Recover Data from a Disk That Was Accidentally Deleted?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0082.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0082.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"139", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Capacity", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Capacity", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0031.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0031.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"108", + "code":"140", "des":"The maximum capacity supported for a system disk is 1024 GiB.The maximum capacity supported for a data disk is 32768 GiB.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Is the Maximum Capacity Supported for the System and Data Disks?,Capacity,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Is the Maximum Capacity Supported for the System and Data Disks?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0032.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0032.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"109", - "des":"If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:Create a new disk and attach it to the server.Expand the capacity of the existing disk. Both system disks and data disks can", + "code":"141", + "des":"If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:Create a new disk and attach it to the server. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.Expand the capacity of the existing disk.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If My Disk Starts to Run Out of Space?,Capacity,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Starts to Run Out of Space?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_faq_0035.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0069.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0069.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"110", - "des":"If your disk capacity is greater than 2 TB, do not use fdisk to partition the disk. Or any space in excess of 2 TB will be unable to be displayed after the disk is partit", + "code":"142", + "des":"The capacity of a single disk can be expanded to up to 32 TiB. If this still fails to meet your needs, it is recommended that you create RAID arrays with EVS disks or man", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TB and Then the Space in Excess o", - "title":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TB and Then the Space in Excess of 2 TB Cannot Be Displayed?", + "kw":"What Can I Do If the Capacity of My Disk Reaches the Maximum But I Still Need More Space?,Capacity,U", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"What Can I Do If the Capacity of My Disk Reaches the Maximum But I Still Need More Space?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0035.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0035.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"143", + "des":"If your disk capacity is greater than 2 TiB, do not use fdisk to partition the disk. Or any space in excess of 2 TiB will be unable to show up after the disk is partition", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TiB and Then the Space in Excess ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TiB and Then the Space in Excess of 2 TiB Cannot Be Displayed?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0053.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0053.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"111", + "code":"144", "des":"You can view your disk usages in either of the following ways:View disk usages manually.The details depend on the OS. This FAQ uses Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 20", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I View My Disk Usage?,Capacity,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Can I View My Disk Usage?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0084.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0061.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0061.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"112", + "code":"145", + "des":"Sorry, you cannot.Currently, the capacity of an EVS disk cannot be transferred to another disk. Multiple EVS disks cannot be combined into a single, larger disk, either.C", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Transfer the Data Disk Capacity to a System Disk?,Capacity,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Transfer the Data Disk Capacity to a System Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_280807.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_280807.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"146", + "des":"Troubleshoot this issue by performing the following steps:Check whether the disk partition usage is 100% or almost 100%.df -hChecking the partition usageIn this example, ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why the Space of My New Disk Is Full After I Uploaded Only 500 MB of Files to the Disk?,Capacity,Use", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why the Space of My New Disk Is Full After I Uploaded Only 500 MB of Files to the Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0092.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0092.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"147", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Snapshot", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Snapshot", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0046.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0046.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"148", + "des":"A snapshot creation will fail if its source disk is in an intermediate state, such as Attaching and Expanding, or an abnormal state, such as Error and Restoration failed.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"What Are the Typical Causes of a Snapshot Creation Failure?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"What Are the Typical Causes of a Snapshot Creation Failure?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0051.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0051.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"149", + "des":"No, but you can develop a program to periodically create snapshots through APIs. Alternatively, you may use the CBR service and enable auto backup to create backups perio", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Does EVS Support Automatic Snapshot Creation?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Does EVS Support Automatic Snapshot Creation?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0070.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0070.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"150", + "des":"No.Snapshots cannot be created for multiple disks at the same time. You must create snapshots for disks one by one.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Create Snapshots for Multiple Disks at a Time?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Create Snapshots for Multiple Disks at a Time?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0057.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0057.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"151", + "des":"There are two types of snapshots: manual snapshots you create on-demand and automatic snapshots created by the system.Manual snapshots: You may manually create snapshots ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Is a Snapshot Created for My Disk?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Is a Snapshot Created for My Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0058.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0058.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"152", + "des":"Possible causes are as follows:Snapshot data can be rolled back only when the status of the snapshot's source disk is Available or Rollback failed. If the snapshot's sour", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Can't I Roll Back My Disk Data from a Snapshot?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why Can't I Roll Back My Disk Data from a Snapshot?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0062.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0062.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"153", + "des":"If you have reinstalled or changed the server OS, snapshots of the system disk are automatically deleted. Snapshots of the data disks can be used as usual.If you have for", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Roll Back the Data from a Snapshot After Reinstalling the OS or Formatting the Disk?,Snapshot,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Roll Back the Data from a Snapshot After Reinstalling the OS or Formatting the Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0063.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0063.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"154", + "des":"When you create a snapshot for a disk for the first time, the snapshot is a full snapshot, and its size is the same as the disk size. Subsequent snapshots created for the", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Is the Snapshot Size Calculated?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Is the Snapshot Size Calculated?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0064.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0064.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"155", + "des":"No.Snapshots are stored on the physical disks that provide storage resources for EVS disks. Therefore, snapshots do not use the EVS disk space.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Do Snapshots Take Space on the Disk?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Do Snapshots Take Space on the Disk?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0088.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0088.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"156", + "des":"Yes. You can roll back a snapshot to the source disk multiple times as needed.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Perform Multiple Rollback Operations for a Snapshot?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Perform Multiple Rollback Operations for a Snapshot?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0089.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0089.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"157", + "des":"No. Snapshots cannot be replicated to other regions or accounts.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Replicate Snapshots to Other Regions or Accounts?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Replicate Snapshots to Other Regions or Accounts?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0102.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0102.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"158", + "des":"Possible causes are:You have manually deleted the snapshot.You have deleted the disk based on which the snapshot was created. If a disk is deleted, all the snapshots crea", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Can't I Find My Snapshot?,Snapshot,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Why Can't I Find My Snapshot?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_281112.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_281112.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"159", + "des":"The following two scenarios are supported:You can first use a snapshot to create a disk and then use the snapshot to roll back data of its source disk.You can first use a", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Can I Use a Snapshot to Create a Disk and Roll Back Disk Data at Almost the Same Time?,Snapshot,User", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Can I Use a Snapshot to Create a Disk and Roll Back Disk Data at Almost the Same Time?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0080.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0080.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"160", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Performance", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Performance", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0019.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0019.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"161", + "des":"In the disk performance test, if the start sector number is not 4-KiB aligned, the disk performance will be greatly affected. Ensure that the start sector number is 4-KiB", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Test My Disk Performance?,Performance,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Test My Disk Performance?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0080.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0080.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"162", + "des":"You have followed the test performance method, but the test results do not meet expectations.During a disk performance test, the disk and stress test conditions play an i", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Does My Disk Performance Test Using Fio Have Incorrect Results?,Performance,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"Why Does My Disk Performance Test Using Fio Have Incorrect Results?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0081.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0081.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"163", + "des":"SymptomIf you are aware of a service slowdown, depending on if you are examining a Windows or Linux server, you can take the following actions:Windows: Open Task Manager ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Can I Handle a Slowdown in Disk Read/Write Speed or Increased I/Os?,Performance,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], + "title":"How Can I Handle a Slowdown in Disk Read/Write Speed or Increased I/Os?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_280905.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_280905.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"164", + "des":"SymptomA 500 GiB ultra-high I/O disk had an I/O usage of 99.94%, but it only had 12,000 IOPS.Description100% disk I/O usage does not mean that the disk IOPS reaches the m", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why My Disk's Read IOPS Can't Reach the Theoretical Maximum IOPS When the Disk I/O Usage Is Almost 1", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Why My Disk's Read IOPS Can't Reach the Theoretical Maximum IOPS When the Disk I/O Usage Is Almost 100%?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0084.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0084.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"165", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Sharing", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Sharing", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0039.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0039.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"113", + "code":"166", "des":"Yes.If you simply attach a shared disk to multiple servers, files cannot be shared among them. Because there are no mutually agreed data read/write rules among servers, r", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Do I Have to Deploy a Cluster to Use Shared Disks?,Sharing,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Do I Have to Deploy a Cluster to Use Shared Disks?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0037.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0037.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"114", + "code":"167", "des":"A shared disk can be attached to up to 16 servers.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Many Servers Can I Attach a Shared Disk to?,Sharing,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Many Servers Can I Attach a Shared Disk to?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0038.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0038.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"115", - "des":"A shared disk can be attached to multiple servers on the management console. You can choose to attach it to servers one by one or in a batch.", + "code":"168", + "des":"A shared disk can be attached to multiple servers on the management console. You can choose to attach it to servers one by one or in a batch.For details, see Attaching a ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Multiple Servers?,Sharing,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Multiple Servers?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0068.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0068.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"116", - "des":"No. A Shared disk can only be attached to servers that belong to the same account and are in the same AZ.", + "code":"169", + "des":"No. A shared disk can only be attached to servers that belong to the same account and are in the same AZ.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can a Shared Disk Be Attached to Servers That Belong to Different Accounts?,Sharing,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can a Shared Disk Be Attached to Servers That Belong to Different Accounts?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_faq_0083.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0083.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"117", + "code":"170", "des":"It is recommended that you do not simultaneously attach a shared disk to servers running Linux and Windows.If a shared disk is attached to servers running different versi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Servers Running Different OSs?,Sharing,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Servers Running Different OSs?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"evs_01_0039.html", + "uri":"evs_faq_0098.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0098.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"118", + "code":"171", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Backup", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Backup", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_faq_0097.html", + "node_id":"evs_faq_0097.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"172", + "des":"No. You can back up disks when the server is in use. When a server is running, data is written into disks on the server, and some newly generated data is cached in the se", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Do I Need to Stop the Server Before Performing a Disk Backup?,Backup,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Do I Need to Stop the Server Before Performing a Disk Backup?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"evs_01_0039.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0039.xml", + "product_code":"evs", + "code":"173", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Appendix", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Appendix", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0040.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0040.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"119", - "des":"An EVS disk has several statuses. Table 1 lists the EVS disk statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a disk in each status allows.Disk status detailsEVS ", + "code":"174", + "des":"An EVS disk has several statuses. Table 1 lists EVS disk statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a disk in each status allows.Disk status detailsEVS Disk", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Disk Status,Appendix,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Disk Status", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0041.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0041.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"120", + "code":"175", "des":"An EVS snapshot has several statuses. Table 1 lists the EVS snapshot statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a snapshot in each status allows.Snapshot st", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"EVS Snapshot Status,Appendix,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"EVS Snapshot Status", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0114.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0114.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"121", + "code":"176", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Change History,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], "title":"Change History", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"evs_01_0115.html", + "node_id":"evs_01_0115.xml", "product_code":"evs", - "code":"122", + "code":"177", "des":"For details about the terms involved in this document, see Glossary.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Glossary,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"evs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "opensource":"true", + "IsBot":"Yes" + } + ], "title":"Glossary", "githuburl":"" } diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json b/docs/evs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json index caeb3659..759ef8f4 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json +++ b/docs/evs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ "code":"7" }, { - "desc":"EVS allows you to create snapshots for disks on the management console or by making API calls. An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific ", + "desc":"An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific point in time. Snapshots can be used as a disaster recovery (DR) approach, and you can use snap", "product_code":"evs", "title":"EVS Snapshot", "uri":"en-us_topic_0066809008.html", @@ -90,22 +90,40 @@ "code":"10" }, { - "desc":"If you need to assign different permissions to employees in your enterprise to access your EVS resources, IAM is a good choice for fine-grained permissions management. IA", + "desc":"The backend storage system of EVS employs three-copy redundancy to guarantee data reliability. With this mechanism, one piece of data is by default divided into multiple ", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Permissions Management", - "uri":"evs_01_0086.html", + "title":"EVS Three-Copy Redundancy", + "uri":"evs_01_0056.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", "code":"11" }, { - "desc":"Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.Relationships between EVS and other servicesECS: EVS disks can be attached to ECSs and used as scalable bl", + "desc":"If you need to assign different permissions to employees in your enterprise to access your EVS resources, IAM is a good choice for fine-grained permissions management. IA", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Permissions", + "uri":"evs_01_0086.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"1", + "code":"12" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes the constraints on using EVS.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Constraints", + "uri":"evs_01_0085.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"1", + "code":"13" + }, + { + "desc":"Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.Relationships between EVS and other services", "product_code":"evs", "title":"EVS and Other Services", "uri":"evs_01_0106.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"12" + "code":"14" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -114,7 +132,16 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"13" + "code":"15" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"EVS Concepts", + "uri":"evs_01_0102.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"15", + "code":"16" }, { "desc":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center, which", @@ -122,8 +149,8 @@ "title":"Region and AZ", "uri":"evs_01_0097.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"13", - "code":"14" + "p_code":"15", + "code":"17" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -132,61 +159,61 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"15" - }, - { - "desc":"Figure 1 shows the basic EVS operation procedure.Basic operation procedure", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Basic Operation Procedure", - "uri":"evs_01_0057.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"15", - "code":"16" - }, - { - "desc":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers.System disks can only be created together with servers and are automatically attached.A system disk can ha", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Create an EVS Disk", - "uri":"en-us_topic_0021738346.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"15", - "code":"17" - }, - { - "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Attach an EVS Disk", - "uri":"evs_01_0107.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"15", "code":"18" }, { - "desc":"Independently created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this ", + "desc":"Figure 1 shows the EVS process overview.Process overviewEVS disks can be attached to servers and be used as system disks or data disks. For details, see Table 1.Method of", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Attaching a Non-Shared Disk", - "uri":"evs_01_0036.html", + "title":"Process Overview", + "uri":"evs_01_0057.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"18", "code":"19" }, { - "desc":"Independently created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this ", + "desc":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers. You can create data disks on the EVS console, or create them together with system disks on the ECS consol", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Attaching a Shared Disk", - "uri":"evs_01_0037.html", + "title":"Create an EVS Disk", + "uri":"en-us_topic_0021738346.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"18", "code":"20" }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attach an EVS Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0107.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"18", + "code":"21" + }, + { + "desc":"Separately created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this cas", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching a Non-Shared Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0036.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"21", + "code":"22" + }, + { + "desc":"Separately created shared EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such a disk is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching a Shared Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0037.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"21", + "code":"23" + }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Initialize an EVS Data Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0058.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"15", - "code":"21" + "p_code":"18", + "code":"24" }, { "desc":"After a disk is attached to a server, you need to log in to the server to initialize the disk, that is, format the disk. You must initialize a disk before accessing it.Sy", @@ -194,8 +221,8 @@ "title":"Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles", "uri":"evs_01_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"22" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"25" }, { "desc":"This section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Windows.The maximum disk capacity support", @@ -203,8 +230,8 @@ "title":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2008)", "uri":"evs_01_0108.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"23" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"26" }, { "desc":"This section uses Windows Server 2019 Standard 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Windows.The maximum disk capacity supported by", @@ -212,8 +239,8 @@ "title":"Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2019)", "uri":"evs_01_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"24" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"27" }, { "desc":"This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use fdisk to partition the data disk.The maximum parti", @@ -221,8 +248,8 @@ "title":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (fdisk)", "uri":"evs_01_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"25" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"28" }, { "desc":"This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use parted to partition the data disk.The maximum part", @@ -230,8 +257,8 @@ "title":"Initializing a Linux Data Disk (parted)", "uri":"evs_01_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"26" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"29" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -240,25 +267,79 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0087.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"27" + "code":"30" }, { - "desc":"This chapter describes how to use IAM to implement fine-grained permissions control for your EVS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users for employees based on your", + "desc":"You can use IAM for fine-grained permissions control for your EVS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users for workforce based on your enterprise's organizational st", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Creating a User and Granting EVS Permissions", "uri":"evs_01_0089.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"28" + "p_code":"30", + "code":"31" }, { - "desc":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system-defined policies of EVS. For the actions supported for custom policies, see section \"Permissions Policies and Supp", + "desc":"You can create custom policies to supplement the system-defined policies of EVS. For the actions supported for custom policies, see section \"Permissions Policies and Supp", "product_code":"evs", "title":"EVS Custom Policies", "uri":"evs_01_0090.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"29" + "p_code":"30", + "code":"32" + }, + { + "desc":"Figure 1 shows the basic EVS operation process.Process overviewEVS disks can be attached to servers and be used as system disks or data disks. For details, see Table 1.Me", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Creating and Using an EVS Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0201.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"33" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching an Existing Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0073.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"34" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to attach an existing system disk.System disks can only be attached offline, which means that the server must be in the Stopped state.You can v", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching an Existing System Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0074.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"34", + "code":"35" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to attach an existing non-shared disk to a server and use it as a data disk. A non-shared disk can be attached to one server only.You can view ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching an Existing Non-Shared Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0075.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"34", + "code":"36" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to attach an existing shared disk to a server and use it as a data disk.You can view the disk information in the disk list. A shared disk can b", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Attaching an Existing Shared Disk", + "uri":"evs_01_0076.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"34", + "code":"37" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to view disk details, including the disk status and specifications. You can view disk details:From the EVS ConsoleFrom the Cloud Server Console", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Viewing EVS Disk Details", + "uri":"evs_01_0093.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"38" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -267,16 +348,16 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0059.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"30" + "code":"39" }, { - "desc":"If the capacity of an existing disk is insufficient, you can expand the disk capacity to increase the storage space.Both system disks and data disks can be expanded. Disk", + "desc":"If the capacity of an existing disk is insufficient, you can expand the disk capacity to increase the storage space.Both system disks and data disks can be expanded. A sy", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Expansion Overview", "uri":"evs_01_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"31" + "p_code":"39", + "code":"40" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to expand the capacity of an In-use EVS disk on the management console. The In-use status indicates that the disk has been attached to a server", @@ -284,8 +365,8 @@ "title":"Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"32" + "p_code":"39", + "code":"41" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to expand the capacity of an Available EVS disk on the management console. The Available status indicates that the disk has not been attached t", @@ -293,17 +374,26 @@ "title":"Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"33" + "p_code":"39", + "code":"42" }, { - "desc":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the ad", + "desc":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the addition", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2008)", "uri":"en-us_topic_0017616396.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"34" + "p_code":"39", + "code":"43" + }, + { + "desc":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Windows, you must allocate the addition", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2016)", + "uri":"evs_01_0126.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"39", + "code":"44" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -311,8 +401,8 @@ "title":"Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Linux)", "uri":"evs_01_0094.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"35" + "p_code":"39", + "code":"45" }, { "desc":"Before extending the disk partition and file system, you must check the disk partition style and file system format, and then select the appropriate operation accordingly", @@ -320,98 +410,71 @@ "title":"Partition and File System Extension Preparations (Linux)", "uri":"evs_01_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"36" + "p_code":"45", + "code":"46" }, { - "desc":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "desc":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for System Disks (Linux)", "uri":"evs_01_0072.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"37" + "p_code":"45", + "code":"47" }, { - "desc":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "desc":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for Data Disks (Linux)", "uri":"evs_01_0109.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"38" + "p_code":"45", + "code":"48" }, { - "desc":"After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the addi", + "desc":"After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.In Linux, you must allocate the additional", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Extending Partitions and File Systems for SCSI Disks (Linux)", "uri":"evs_01_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"39" + "p_code":"45", + "code":"49" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Detaching an EVS Disk", + "title":"Detaching and Releasing an EVS Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"40" + "code":"50" }, { - "desc":"A system disk can only be detached offline, that is, its server must be in the Stopped state before the system disk is detached. Therefore, you need to first stop the ser", + "desc":"If the file system on your system disk is damaged and your server cannot be started, you can detach the system disk and attach it to another server as a data disk. After ", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Detaching a System Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"41" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"51" }, { - "desc":"Data disks can be detached online or offline, which means that the server containing the to-be-detached data disk can either be in the Running or Stopped state.ECSDetach ", + "desc":"If you want to use a data disk on another server in the same region and AZ, you can detach the data disk and then attach it to that server.If a data disk is no longer req", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Detaching a Data Disk", "uri":"evs_01_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"42" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"52" }, { - "desc":"If an EVS disk is no longer used, you can release the virtual resources by deleting the disk from the system.Before deleting a disk, ensure that the disk status is Availa", + "desc":"If an EVS disk is no longer used, you can release the virtual resources by deleting it.The disk status is Available, Error, Expansion failed, Restoration failed, or Rollb", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Deleting EVS Disks", "uri":"evs_01_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"43" - }, - { - "desc":"The encryption function can be used to encrypt system disks, data disks, backups and snapshots. The details are as follows:System disk encryption relies on the image that", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks", - "uri":"evs_01_0009.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"44" - }, - { - "desc":"You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach the shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.S", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Managing Shared EVS Disks", - "uri":"evs_01_0010.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"45" - }, - { - "desc":"EVS backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.This section describes how to con", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Managing EVS Backups", - "uri":"evs_01_0110.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"46" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"53" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -420,43 +483,52 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0111.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"47" + "code":"54" }, { - "desc":"EVS allows you to create snapshots for disks on the management console or by making API calls. An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific ", + "desc":"An EVS snapshot is a complete copy or image of the disk data at a specific point in time. Snapshots can be used as a disaster recovery (DR) approach, and you can use snap", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Snapshot Overview", "uri":"evs_01_0098.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"47", - "code":"48" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"55" }, { - "desc":"You can create an EVS snapshot on the management console to save the EVS disk data at a specific time point.A maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for one disk.Snapshots", + "desc":"You can create an EVS snapshot on the management console to save the EVS disk data at a specific time point.Creating snapshots does not affect the performance of the disk", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Creating a Snapshot", "uri":"en-us_topic_0066615262.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"47", - "code":"49" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"56" }, { - "desc":"If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete the snapshot to release the virtual resources. Snapshot deletion has the following constraints:The snapshot status must ", + "desc":"If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete it to release the virtual resources.The snapshot status must be Available or Error.If a disk is deleted, all the snapsho", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Deleting a Snapshot", "uri":"evs_01_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"47", - "code":"50" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"57" }, { - "desc":"If the data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back the data from a snapshot to the source disk to restore data. Snapshot rollback has the following con", + "desc":"This section describes how to view the details of a snapshot.The snapshot list page is displayed.On the details page, view the snapshot information, such as the snapshot ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Viewing Details of a Snapshot", + "uri":"evs_01_0122.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"54", + "code":"58" + }, + { + "desc":"If data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back data from a snapshot to the source disk.Data of a snapshot can be rolled back only to its source disk. R", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Rolling Back Data from a Snapshot", "uri":"evs_01_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"47", - "code":"51" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"59" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to create an EVS disk on the Snapshots page. Besides, you can also create an EVS disk from a snapshot by specifying the Create from snapshot pa", @@ -464,8 +536,98 @@ "title":"Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot", "uri":"evs_01_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"47", - "code":"52" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"60" + }, + { + "desc":"System disk encryptionSystem disks are created along with servers and cannot be created separately. So whether a system disk is encrypted or not depends on the image sele", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Managing Encrypted EVS Disks", + "uri":"evs_01_0009.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"61" + }, + { + "desc":"You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach a shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.Sha", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Managing Shared EVS Disks", + "uri":"evs_01_0010.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"62" + }, + { + "desc":"EVS disk backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.You can configure a backup p", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Managing EVS Backups", + "uri":"evs_01_0110.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"63" + }, + { + "desc":"EVS transfer allows you to transfer disks from one account to another. After a transfer succeeds, the ownership of the disk belongs to the target account only.Users can u", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Managing EVS Transfers", + "uri":"evs_01_0042.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"64" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Manage EVS Tags", + "uri":"evs_01_0112.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"", + "code":"65" + }, + { + "desc":"Tags identify EVS resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Tag Overview", + "uri":"evs_01_0099.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"65", + "code":"66" + }, + { + "desc":"You can add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.A tag is composed of a key-value pair.Key:", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Adding a Tag", + "uri":"evs_01_0014.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"65", + "code":"67" + }, + { + "desc":"You can change the value of a tag for an existing disk, but cannot change the key of a tag.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Edit Tag", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Modifying a Tag", + "uri":"evs_01_0015.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"65", + "code":"68" + }, + { + "desc":"If an existing tag is no longer needed, you can delete it.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Delete Tag page is displayed.The tag is d", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Deleting a Tag", + "uri":"evs_01_0016.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"65", + "code":"69" + }, + { + "desc":"Tags can be used to categorize EVS disks, and users can quickly search for their desired EVS disks by tags. This section is used to guide users to search for EVS disk by ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Searching for Disks by Tag", + "uri":"evs_01_0019.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"65", + "code":"70" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -474,7 +636,7 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"53" + "code":"71" }, { "desc":"For the EVS replication concepts, see EVS Replication (Deprecated). This chapter describes the basic functions and operations of EVS replication. Figure 1 shows the opera", @@ -482,8 +644,8 @@ "title":"EVS Replication Operation Procedure (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"54" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"72" }, { "desc":"Before you create an EVS replication pair, create a DR ECS in the secondary AZ for the production ECS. The DR ECS parameters must be consistent with those of the producti", @@ -491,8 +653,8 @@ "title":"Creating a DR ECS (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"55" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"73" }, { "desc":"Before you use EVS replication, bind a virtual IP address to the production server and DR server, respectively. Then configure the virtual IP address as the static IP add", @@ -500,8 +662,8 @@ "title":"Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"56" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"74" }, { "desc":"This section is used to guide users to collect the production ECS and DR ECS information, including the ECS IDs and the IDs of the EVS disks attached the ECSs.Two EVS dis", @@ -509,8 +671,8 @@ "title":"Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"57" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"75" }, { "desc":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create EVS replication pairs. Each server can have multiple EVS replication pairs. For details, see EVS Replication Pair in the", @@ -518,8 +680,8 @@ "title":"Creating an EVS Replication Pair (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"58" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"76" }, { "desc":"Currently, users need to make API calls to create replication consistency groups and add EVS replication pairs to the groups. For details, see Replication Consistency Gro", @@ -527,8 +689,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"59" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"77" }, { "desc":"Currently, EVS replication pairs can be added to or removed from replication consistency groups through APIs only. For details, see Updating a Replication Consistency Gro", @@ -536,8 +698,8 @@ "title":"Updating a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"60" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"78" }, { "desc":"Production servers and production disks belong to the primary AZ, and DR servers and DR disks belong to the secondary AZ. Users can make API calls to perform a planned mi", @@ -545,8 +707,8 @@ "title":"Planned Migration (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"61" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"79" }, { "desc":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure, users can make API calls to perform a failover for the replication consistency", @@ -554,8 +716,8 @@ "title":"Failover (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"62" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"80" }, { "desc":"When the production servers and disks in the primary AZ become faulty due to force majeure and a failover has been performed, enable the DR servers and disks to provide s", @@ -563,8 +725,8 @@ "title":"Reprotection (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"63" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"81" }, { "desc":"Users can make an API call to expand the EVS disks in one or multiple EVS replication pairs of a replication consistency group. In such an expansion operation, two EVS di", @@ -572,71 +734,44 @@ "title":"Expanding EVS Disks in a Replication Consistency Group (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_01_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"53", - "code":"64" - }, - { - "desc":"Through EVS transfer, EVS disks can be transferred from one account to another. After the transfer succeeds, the ownerships of the EVS disks belong to the target account ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Managing EVS Transfers", - "uri":"evs_01_0042.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"65" + "p_code":"71", + "code":"82" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Managing a Tag", - "uri":"evs_01_0112.html", + "title":"Manage EVS Quotas", + "uri":"evs_01_0069.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"66" + "code":"83" }, { - "desc":"Tags identify EVS resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.", + "desc":"Quotas are enforced for service resources on the platform to prevent unforeseen spikes in resource usage. Quotas can limit the number or amount of resources available to ", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Tag Overview", - "uri":"evs_01_0099.html", + "title":"Querying EVS Resource Quotas", + "uri":"evs_01_0070.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"67" + "p_code":"83", + "code":"84" }, { - "desc":"This section is used to guide users to add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.Tags are us", + "desc":"If any resource quota no longer meets your service requirements, you can apply for a higher quota.The system does not support online quota adjustment. If you need to adju", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Adding a Tag", - "uri":"evs_01_0014.html", + "title":"Increasing EVS Resource Quotas", + "uri":"evs_01_0071.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"68" + "p_code":"83", + "code":"85" }, { - "desc":"You can change the value of a tag for an existing disk, but cannot change the key of a tag.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Edit Tag", + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Modifying a Tag", - "uri":"evs_01_0015.html", + "title":"Managing EVS Monitoring Data", + "uri":"evs_01_2704.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"69" - }, - { - "desc":"If an existing tag is no longer needed, you can delete it.The disk list page is displayed.The disk details page is displayed.The Delete Tag page is displayed.Return to th", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Deleting a Tag", - "uri":"evs_01_0016.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"70" - }, - { - "desc":"Tags can be used to categorize EVS disks, and users can quickly search for their desired EVS disks by tags. This section is used to guide users to search for EVS disk by ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Searching Disks by Tags", - "uri":"evs_01_0019.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"71" + "p_code":"", + "code":"86" }, { "desc":"This section describes monitored metrics reported by EVS to Cloud Eye as well as their namespaces and dimensions. You can use the console or APIs provided by Cloud Eye to", @@ -644,17 +779,17 @@ "title":"Viewing EVS Monitoring Data", "uri":"evs_01_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"", - "code":"72" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"87" }, { "desc":"EVS supports the recording of EVS operations through CTS. You can query EVS traces and use them for historical operation audits and backtracks.CTS has been enabled.To vie", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Auditing", + "title":"Auditing EVS Operation Records", "uri":"evs_01_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"73" + "code":"88" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -663,7 +798,16 @@ "uri":"evs_faq_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"74" + "code":"89" + }, + { + "desc":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?Can EVS Disks Be Used Directly for Storage?Can EVS Disks Be Used Alone?Can I Change the AZ of My Disk?Can I Change the Disk Type", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Summary", + "uri":"evs_01_0096.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"90" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -671,17 +815,17 @@ "title":"General", "uri":"evs_01_0081.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"75" + "p_code":"89", + "code":"91" }, { - "desc":"A newly purchased disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server operating system before you can use it.", + "desc":"A newly created disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server OS before you can use it.For more information, see Process Overview.", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Purchased Disk?", + "title":"How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?", "uri":"evs_faq_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"76" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"92" }, { "desc":"No.EVS disks must be attached to cloud servers before use. You cannot use EVS disks alone to store data.", @@ -689,8 +833,8 @@ "title":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Directly for Storage?", "uri":"evs_faq_0065.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"77" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"93" }, { "desc":"No.EVS disks must be attached to servers before you can use them.", @@ -698,8 +842,8 @@ "title":"Can EVS Disks Be Used Alone?", "uri":"evs_faq_0054.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"78" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"94" }, { "desc":"To do so, perform the following operations:The disk list page is displayed.View more information on the Summary tab.", @@ -707,8 +851,17 @@ "title":"How Can I View My Disk Details?", "uri":"evs_faq_0066.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"79" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"95" + }, + { + "desc":"Disk names are used to identify disks. After a disk is created, you can perform operations in this section to change the disk name if needed.The disk list page is display", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Do I Change the Name of My Disk?", + "uri":"evs_01_0061.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"91", + "code":"96" }, { "desc":"No.The AZ of a disk cannot be changed after you have created the disk. If you want to change the AZ, delete the disk and create a new one.", @@ -716,8 +869,17 @@ "title":"Can I Change the AZ of My Disk?", "uri":"evs_faq_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"80" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"97" + }, + { + "desc":"The following table describes whether the disk type, device type, sharing, and encryption attributes of a disk can be changed.However, you can:Create a backup for the dis", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Change the Disk Type, Device Type, or Sharing Attribute of My Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0045.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"91", + "code":"98" }, { "desc":"If an error occurs, the disk may show one of the states listed in the following table. Take the measures described in the table to handle the exceptions.", @@ -725,8 +887,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If an Error Occurs on My EVS Disk?", "uri":"evs_faq_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"81" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"99" }, { "desc":"EVS disks have two device types: VBD and SCSI. WWNs are used as the unique identifiers for SCSI EVS disks, and VBD EVS disks do not have WWNs.You can view the WWN of a SC", @@ -734,8 +896,8 @@ "title":"Why Do Some of My EVS Disks Not Have WWN Information?", "uri":"evs_faq_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"82" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"100" }, { "desc":"If the system displays a message indicating insufficient quota during an EVS replication pair creation or a replication consistency group creation or update, contact the ", @@ -743,17 +905,26 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If My EVS Replication Quotas Are Insufficient? (Deprecated)", "uri":"evs_faq_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"83" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"101" }, { - "desc":"A system disk runs the server operating system. It is like drive C in a PC.When a server is created, a system disk is automatically created and attached. You cannot creat", + "desc":"Data migration involves the following scenarios:Cross-AZ data migration: Disk data can be migrated from one AZ to another through disk backups. You can create backups for", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Migrate Data from an EVS Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0059.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"91", + "code":"102" + }, + { + "desc":"A system disk runs the server OS. It is like drive C in a PC.When a server is created, a system disk is automatically created and attached. You cannot create a system dis", "product_code":"evs", "title":"What Are the Differences Between System Disks and Data Disks?", "uri":"evs_faq_0084.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"84" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"103" }, { "desc":"EVS disk data cannot be directly saved to a local PC. It is recommended that you use a third-party tool, such as FTP, to download the data.", @@ -761,8 +932,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Download My EVS Disk Data to a Local PC?", "uri":"evs_faq_0087.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"85" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"104" }, { "desc":"Solution:Install the ntfsprogs software to enable Linux to access the NTFS file system.yum install ntfsprogsyum install ntfsprogsView the data disks previously attached t", @@ -770,8 +941,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Export the Original Data After I Changed My Server OS from Windows to CentOS?", "uri":"evs_faq_0091.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"86" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"105" }, { "desc":"Table 1 lists the common disk partition styles. In Linux, different partition styles require different partitioning tools.The maximum disk size supported by MBR is 2 TiB,", @@ -779,89 +950,26 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between MBR and GPT Partition Styles?", "uri":"evs_faq_0092.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"75", - "code":"87" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"106" }, { - "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "desc":"Before an EVS disk is attached, the system will call the reserveVolume EVS API to check whether the disk can be attached. If it can be attached, the system then changes t", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Capacity Expansion", - "uri":"evs_01_0077.html", + "title":"What Does the \"reserveVolume\" Trace Mean in CTS?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0095.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"88" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"107" }, { - "desc":"No. The disk capacity can only be expanded, and temporary capacity expansion is not supported.", + "desc":"EVS disks must be attached to servers before you can use them. For how to upload files, see section \"How Do I Upload Files to My ECS?\" in the Elastic Cloud Server FAQs.", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0026.html", + "title":"How Can I Upload Files to My EVS Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0096.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"89" - }, - { - "desc":"The differences are as follows:Expanding an EVS disk is when you expand the capacity of an existing EVS disk. Some systems let you expand the capacity of EVS disks in use", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS Disk?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0075.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"90" - }, - { - "desc":"Data will not be deleted during a system disk or data disk capacity expansion. However, misoperations during an expansion may result in data loss or exceptions. Exercise ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0044.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"91" - }, - { - "desc":"An EVS disk can be expanded either in the Available or In-use state. Expanding the disk capacity on the management console enlarges the disk capacity, but you still need ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0042.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"92" - }, - { - "desc":"An expansion consists of two phases:Expand the disk capacity on the management console.A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0028.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"93" - }, - { - "desc":"An EVS system disk can be as large as 1 TiB (1,024 GiB). You can expand the capacity of a system disk to up to 1 TiB.An EVS data disk can be as large as 32 TiB (32,768 Gi", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0024.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"94" - }, - { - "desc":"After expanding disk capacity on the management console, you must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system for the extra capacity to become avai", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0027.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"95" - }, - { - "desc":"If no partition but only a file system is created on a data disk, extend the file system according to the following operations:Run the lsblk command. Information similar ", - "product_code":"evs", - "title":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?", - "uri":"evs_faq_0073.html", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"96" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"108" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -869,8 +977,8 @@ "title":"Attachment", "uri":"evs_01_0078.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"97" + "p_code":"89", + "code":"109" }, { "desc":"Symptom: A data disk has been attached to a Linux server on the management console, but the disk cannot be viewed on the server.Run df -TH to view the disk information. C", @@ -878,8 +986,17 @@ "title":"Why Can't I View the Attached Data Disk on the Server?", "uri":"evs_faq_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"98" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"110" + }, + { + "desc":"My disk cannot be attached to a server.Possible causes are listed here in order of their probability.If the fault persists after you have ruled out one cause, move on to ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0025.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"109", + "code":"111" }, { "desc":"A non-shared disk can only be attached to one server.A shared disk can be attached to up to 16 servers. Shared disks are a type of EVS disks that can be attached to multi", @@ -887,8 +1004,8 @@ "title":"Can I Attach a Disk to Multiple Servers?", "uri":"evs_faq_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"99" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"112" }, { "desc":"No.Disks and the servers you attach the disks to must be in the same AZ. The same is true for shared disks. Shared disks can only be attached to the servers in the same A", @@ -896,8 +1013,8 @@ "title":"Can I Attach a Disk to a Server in Another AZ?", "uri":"evs_faq_0036.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"100" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"113" }, { "desc":"Data disks can be created during or after the server creation. If you create data disks during the server creation, the system will automatically attach the data disks to", @@ -905,8 +1022,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Add a Data Disk to an Existing Server?", "uri":"evs_faq_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"101" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"114" }, { "desc":"Yes. Different types of EVS disks can be attached to the same server. You only need to make sure that these disks and the server are in the same AZ.", @@ -914,8 +1031,8 @@ "title":"Can I Attach Different Types of Disks to the Same Server?", "uri":"evs_faq_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"102" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"115" }, { "desc":"You are not advised to attach a Linux EVS disk to a Windows server or attach a Windows EVS disk to a Linux server.The disk information may fail to be displayed due to the", @@ -923,8 +1040,161 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If a Linux EVS Disk Is Attached to a Windows Server?", "uri":"evs_faq_0076.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"97", - "code":"103" + "p_code":"109", + "code":"116" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to change the function of a disk on the original server.System disk created along with a server: You can detach the system disk and then re-att", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Change the Function of a System Disk or Data Disk Created Along with a Server?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0078.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"109", + "code":"117" + }, + { + "desc":"You find that the device name displayed in the ECS OS is different from that displayed on the management console and you cannot determine which disk name is correct. This", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Do I Obtain My Disk Device Name in the ECS OS Using the Device Identifier Provided on the Console?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0094.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"109", + "code":"118" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Capacity Expansion", + "uri":"evs_01_0077.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"119" + }, + { + "desc":"No. The disk capacity can only be expanded, and temporary capacity expansion is not supported.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Reduce or Temporarily Expand the Disk Capacity?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0026.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"120" + }, + { + "desc":"The differences are as follows:Expanding an EVS disk is when you expand the capacity of an existing EVS disk. Some systems let you expand the capacity of EVS disks in use", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"What Are the Differences Between Expanding Capacity by Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating a New EVS Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0075.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"121" + }, + { + "desc":"Data will not be deleted during a system disk or data disk capacity expansion. However, incorrect operations during an expansion may result in data loss or exceptions. Ex", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0044.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"122" + }, + { + "desc":"Yes. If backups or snapshots have been created for disks before capacity was expanded, you can restore your disk data from these backups or snapshots after the capacity i", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Use Backups or Snapshots Created Before Capacity Expansion to Restore Data on Expanded Disks?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0023.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"123" + }, + { + "desc":"An EVS disk can be expanded either in the Available or In-use state. Expanding the disk capacity on the management console enlarges the disk capacity, but you still need ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Do I Need to Restart the Server After Expanding the Disk Capacity?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0042.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"124" + }, + { + "desc":"An expansion consists of two phases:Expand the disk capacity on the management console.A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0028.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"125" + }, + { + "desc":"An EVS system disk can be as large as 1 TiB (1,024 GiB). You can expand the capacity of a system disk to up to 1 TiB.An EVS data disk can be as large as 32 TiB (32,768 Gi", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Capacity Exceeds 2 TiB After Expansion?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0024.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"126" + }, + { + "desc":"In Windows, if you already have a D drive and want to add an E drive, refer to the following:The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (F:) and Data Disk: Ad", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to a New Partition?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0029.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"127" + }, + { + "desc":"In Windows, if your disk already has, for example, a D: drive and you want to add space to this volume, refer to the following:The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to an Existing Partition?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0030.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"128" + }, + { + "desc":"After expanding disk capacity on the management console, you must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system for the extra capacity to become avai", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0027.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"129" + }, + { + "desc":"Capacity expansion is not allowed for the disk.Possible causes are listed here in order of their probability.If the fault persists after you have ruled out one cause, mov", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Can't I Expand Capacity for My Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0074.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"130" + }, + { + "desc":"If no partition but only a file system is created on a data disk, extend the file system according to the following operations:Run the lsblk command. Information similar ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0073.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"131" + }, + { + "desc":"If the root partition of your quickly provisioned BMS is too small, extend the root partition by referring to the following procedure.This example uses CentOS 7.3 and sys", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Do I Extend the Root Partition of a Quickly Provisioned BMS?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0082.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"132" + }, + { + "desc":"You can use either fdisk or parted to view the disk partition style.Method 1: Check Partition Style and File System Format Using fdiskMethod 2: Check Partition Style and ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Do I View the Disk Partition Style in Linux?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0131.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"119", + "code":"133" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -932,17 +1202,17 @@ "title":"Detachment", "uri":"evs_01_0079.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"104" + "p_code":"89", + "code":"134" }, { - "desc":"It depends on if the disk is encrypted or not.EncryptedCMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.Before you detach an EVS disk encrypted by a CMK, check whether the CMK i", + "desc":"It depends on if the disk is encrypted or not.EncryptedThe CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.The disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee for how long it", "product_code":"evs", "title":"If I Detach a Disk, Will I Lose the Data on My Disk?", "uri":"evs_faq_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"104", - "code":"105" + "p_code":"134", + "code":"135" }, { "desc":"EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks, but the way you detach each one is different.System disks: A system disk can only be detached offline. You must first", @@ -950,8 +1220,26 @@ "title":"Why Can't I Detach My Disk?", "uri":"evs_faq_0056.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"104", - "code":"106" + "p_code":"134", + "code":"136" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Deletion", + "uri":"evs_01_0083.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"137" + }, + { + "desc":"Check whether the disk has any snapshots or backups created.If there are, use a snapshot or backup to restore the disk data to the state when the snapshot or backup was c", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Recover Data from a Disk That Was Accidentally Deleted?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0079.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"137", + "code":"138" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -959,8 +1247,8 @@ "title":"Capacity", "uri":"evs_01_0082.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"107" + "p_code":"89", + "code":"139" }, { "desc":"The maximum capacity supported for a system disk is 1024 GiB.The maximum capacity supported for a data disk is 32768 GiB.", @@ -968,26 +1256,35 @@ "title":"What Is the Maximum Capacity Supported for the System and Data Disks?", "uri":"evs_faq_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"108" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"140" }, { - "desc":"If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:Create a new disk and attach it to the server.Expand the capacity of the existing disk. Both system disks and data disks can", + "desc":"If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:Create a new disk and attach it to the server. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.Expand the capacity of the existing disk.", "product_code":"evs", "title":"What Should I Do If My Disk Starts to Run Out of Space?", "uri":"evs_faq_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"109" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"141" }, { - "desc":"If your disk capacity is greater than 2 TB, do not use fdisk to partition the disk. Or any space in excess of 2 TB will be unable to be displayed after the disk is partit", + "desc":"The capacity of a single disk can be expanded to up to 32 TiB. If this still fails to meet your needs, it is recommended that you create RAID arrays with EVS disks or man", "product_code":"evs", - "title":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TB and Then the Space in Excess of 2 TB Cannot Be Displayed?", + "title":"What Can I Do If the Capacity of My Disk Reaches the Maximum But I Still Need More Space?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0069.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"139", + "code":"142" + }, + { + "desc":"If your disk capacity is greater than 2 TiB, do not use fdisk to partition the disk. Or any space in excess of 2 TiB will be unable to show up after the disk is partition", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"What Should I Do If I Use fdisk to Initialize a Disk Larger Than 2 TiB and Then the Space in Excess of 2 TiB Cannot Be Displayed?", "uri":"evs_faq_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"110" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"143" }, { "desc":"You can view your disk usages in either of the following ways:View disk usages manually.The details depend on the OS. This FAQ uses Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 20", @@ -995,8 +1292,188 @@ "title":"How Can I View My Disk Usage?", "uri":"evs_faq_0053.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"111" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"144" + }, + { + "desc":"Sorry, you cannot.Currently, the capacity of an EVS disk cannot be transferred to another disk. Multiple EVS disks cannot be combined into a single, larger disk, either.C", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Transfer the Data Disk Capacity to a System Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0061.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"139", + "code":"145" + }, + { + "desc":"Troubleshoot this issue by performing the following steps:Check whether the disk partition usage is 100% or almost 100%.df -hChecking the partition usageIn this example, ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why the Space of My New Disk Is Full After I Uploaded Only 500 MB of Files to the Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_280807.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"139", + "code":"146" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Snapshot", + "uri":"evs_01_0092.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"147" + }, + { + "desc":"A snapshot creation will fail if its source disk is in an intermediate state, such as Attaching and Expanding, or an abnormal state, such as Error and Restoration failed.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"What Are the Typical Causes of a Snapshot Creation Failure?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0046.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"148" + }, + { + "desc":"No, but you can develop a program to periodically create snapshots through APIs. Alternatively, you may use the CBR service and enable auto backup to create backups perio", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Does EVS Support Automatic Snapshot Creation?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0051.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"149" + }, + { + "desc":"No.Snapshots cannot be created for multiple disks at the same time. You must create snapshots for disks one by one.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Create Snapshots for Multiple Disks at a Time?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0070.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"150" + }, + { + "desc":"There are two types of snapshots: manual snapshots you create on-demand and automatic snapshots created by the system.Manual snapshots: You may manually create snapshots ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Is a Snapshot Created for My Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0057.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"151" + }, + { + "desc":"Possible causes are as follows:Snapshot data can be rolled back only when the status of the snapshot's source disk is Available or Rollback failed. If the snapshot's sour", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Can't I Roll Back My Disk Data from a Snapshot?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0058.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"152" + }, + { + "desc":"If you have reinstalled or changed the server OS, snapshots of the system disk are automatically deleted. Snapshots of the data disks can be used as usual.If you have for", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Roll Back the Data from a Snapshot After Reinstalling the OS or Formatting the Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0062.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"153" + }, + { + "desc":"When you create a snapshot for a disk for the first time, the snapshot is a full snapshot, and its size is the same as the disk size. Subsequent snapshots created for the", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Is the Snapshot Size Calculated?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0063.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"154" + }, + { + "desc":"No.Snapshots are stored on the physical disks that provide storage resources for EVS disks. Therefore, snapshots do not use the EVS disk space.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Do Snapshots Take Space on the Disk?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0064.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"155" + }, + { + "desc":"Yes. You can roll back a snapshot to the source disk multiple times as needed.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Perform Multiple Rollback Operations for a Snapshot?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0088.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"156" + }, + { + "desc":"No. Snapshots cannot be replicated to other regions or accounts.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Replicate Snapshots to Other Regions or Accounts?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0089.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"157" + }, + { + "desc":"Possible causes are:You have manually deleted the snapshot.You have deleted the disk based on which the snapshot was created. If a disk is deleted, all the snapshots crea", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Can't I Find My Snapshot?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0102.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"158" + }, + { + "desc":"The following two scenarios are supported:You can first use a snapshot to create a disk and then use the snapshot to roll back data of its source disk.You can first use a", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Can I Use a Snapshot to Create a Disk and Roll Back Disk Data at Almost the Same Time?", + "uri":"evs_faq_281112.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"147", + "code":"159" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Performance", + "uri":"evs_01_0080.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"160" + }, + { + "desc":"In the disk performance test, if the start sector number is not 4-KiB aligned, the disk performance will be greatly affected. Ensure that the start sector number is 4-KiB", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Test My Disk Performance?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0019.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"161" + }, + { + "desc":"You have followed the test performance method, but the test results do not meet expectations.During a disk performance test, the disk and stress test conditions play an i", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why Does My Disk Performance Test Using Fio Have Incorrect Results?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0080.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"162" + }, + { + "desc":"SymptomIf you are aware of a service slowdown, depending on if you are examining a Windows or Linux server, you can take the following actions:Windows: Open Task Manager ", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"How Can I Handle a Slowdown in Disk Read/Write Speed or Increased I/Os?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0081.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"163" + }, + { + "desc":"SymptomA 500 GiB ultra-high I/O disk had an I/O usage of 99.94%, but it only had 12,000 IOPS.Description100% disk I/O usage does not mean that the disk IOPS reaches the m", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Why My Disk's Read IOPS Can't Reach the Theoretical Maximum IOPS When the Disk I/O Usage Is Almost 100%?", + "uri":"evs_faq_280905.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"164" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1004,8 +1481,8 @@ "title":"Sharing", "uri":"evs_01_0084.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"112" + "p_code":"89", + "code":"165" }, { "desc":"Yes.If you simply attach a shared disk to multiple servers, files cannot be shared among them. Because there are no mutually agreed data read/write rules among servers, r", @@ -1013,8 +1490,8 @@ "title":"Do I Have to Deploy a Cluster to Use Shared Disks?", "uri":"evs_faq_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"112", - "code":"113" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"166" }, { "desc":"A shared disk can be attached to up to 16 servers.", @@ -1022,26 +1499,26 @@ "title":"How Many Servers Can I Attach a Shared Disk to?", "uri":"evs_faq_0037.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"112", - "code":"114" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"167" }, { - "desc":"A shared disk can be attached to multiple servers on the management console. You can choose to attach it to servers one by one or in a batch.", + "desc":"A shared disk can be attached to multiple servers on the management console. You can choose to attach it to servers one by one or in a batch.For details, see Attaching a ", "product_code":"evs", "title":"How Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Multiple Servers?", "uri":"evs_faq_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"112", - "code":"115" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"168" }, { - "desc":"No. A Shared disk can only be attached to servers that belong to the same account and are in the same AZ.", + "desc":"No. A shared disk can only be attached to servers that belong to the same account and are in the same AZ.", "product_code":"evs", "title":"Can a Shared Disk Be Attached to Servers That Belong to Different Accounts?", "uri":"evs_faq_0068.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"112", - "code":"116" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"169" }, { "desc":"It is recommended that you do not simultaneously attach a shared disk to servers running Linux and Windows.If a shared disk is attached to servers running different versi", @@ -1049,8 +1526,26 @@ "title":"Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Servers Running Different OSs?", "uri":"evs_faq_0083.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"112", - "code":"117" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"170" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Backup", + "uri":"evs_faq_0098.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"89", + "code":"171" + }, + { + "desc":"No. You can back up disks when the server is in use. When a server is running, data is written into disks on the server, and some newly generated data is cached in the se", + "product_code":"evs", + "title":"Do I Need to Stop the Server Before Performing a Disk Backup?", + "uri":"evs_faq_0097.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"171", + "code":"172" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1059,16 +1554,16 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"118" + "code":"173" }, { - "desc":"An EVS disk has several statuses. Table 1 lists the EVS disk statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a disk in each status allows.Disk status detailsEVS ", + "desc":"An EVS disk has several statuses. Table 1 lists EVS disk statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a disk in each status allows.Disk status detailsEVS Disk", "product_code":"evs", "title":"EVS Disk Status", "uri":"evs_01_0040.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"119" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"174" }, { "desc":"An EVS snapshot has several statuses. Table 1 lists the EVS snapshot statuses, the meaning of each status, and the operations a snapshot in each status allows.Snapshot st", @@ -1076,8 +1571,8 @@ "title":"EVS Snapshot Status", "uri":"evs_01_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"120" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"175" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1086,7 +1581,7 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0114.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"121" + "code":"176" }, { "desc":"For details about the terms involved in this document, see Glossary.", @@ -1095,6 +1590,6 @@ "uri":"evs_01_0115.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"122" + "code":"177" } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001080217203.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001080217203.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61a64eef Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001080217203.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001081131958.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001081131958.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcbd5cd9 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001081131958.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083456418.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083456418.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a6c0386 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083456418.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083680596.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083680596.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9655c1a4 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083680596.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083707294.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083707294.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a36baa23 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083707294.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083722314.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083722314.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e7b857b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083722314.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083835006.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083835006.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0132e01b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001083835006.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001084154922.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001084154922.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b34cba1a Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001084154922.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093163945.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093163945.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd868fd0 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093163945.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167827.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167827.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..239aa35b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167827.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167829.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167829.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3df9d61a Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093167829.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093170285.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093170285.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a199fd2 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093170285.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173277.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173277.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e628652d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173277.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173281.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173281.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b23dd44e Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093173281.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284401.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284401.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7bcf658 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284401.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284403.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284403.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64a5267d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093284403.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093288211.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093288211.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e098570f Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093288211.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093290717.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093290717.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7eec9e21 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093290717.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293761.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293761.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c515b7a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293761.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293763.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293763.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbedd804 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093293763.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093428703.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093428703.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72041f61 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093428703.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431149.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431149.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53027354 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431149.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431151.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431151.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c715400 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093431151.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434175.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434175.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b297773 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434175.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434177.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434177.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1506ed42 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093434177.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568175.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568175.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f9da8fd Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568175.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568177.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568177.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a620f71c Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093568177.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571975.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571975.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc0c02f4 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571975.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571977.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571977.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..760346b2 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571977.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571979.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571979.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f15b2759 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093571979.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093574395.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093574395.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f14a49a4 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093574395.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577389.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577389.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a13825f5 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577389.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577391.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577391.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b27add0b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001093577391.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009866.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009866.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1195343 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009866.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009874.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009874.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93561876 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105009874.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105169704.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105169704.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97d9c910 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001105169704.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127902463.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127902463.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e49c632 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127902463.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127906793.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127906793.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c283762b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001127906793.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001128111323.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001128111323.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1646ed2 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001128111323.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130404567.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130404567.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4d85813 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130404567.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130508073.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130508073.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d826ba13 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130508073.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130646285.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130646285.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..984b0244 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130646285.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130673091.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130673091.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..923177e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130673091.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130785213.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130785213.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dacdf9c7 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130785213.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130811405.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130811405.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9655c1a4 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130811405.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937191.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937191.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c92849b1 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937191.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937239.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937239.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c24cf12d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001130937239.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001145957145.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001145957145.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dcb2f2f3 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001145957145.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001151849605.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001151849605.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b8fdbbb Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001151849605.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487224722.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487224722.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a597d26 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487224722.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487413362.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487413362.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1909444d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001487413362.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001489883750.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001489883750.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95d676fa Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001489883750.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571725570.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571725570.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..565093fb Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571725570.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571754664.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571754664.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4aab7a29 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571754664.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571762676.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571762676.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b9c611e Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571762676.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571900348.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571900348.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a03b2363 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001571900348.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001572095150.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001572095150.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebfe32a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001572095150.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616506910.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616506910.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c2176bb Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616506910.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616705554.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616705554.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eda33c93 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616705554.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616707610.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616707610.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..121eec53 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001616707610.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622204197.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622204197.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ff8f8d7 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622204197.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622372417.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622372417.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5328f2c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001622372417.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001694193601.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001694193601.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a8921a5 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001694193601.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132359404.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029912.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132359404.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029912.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597145.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029916.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597145.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029916.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597153.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029928.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597153.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029928.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083504.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029932.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083504.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029932.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083510.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029936.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083510.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029936.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0238263336.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029940.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0238263336.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809029940.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132360430.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189756.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132360430.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189756.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597147.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189760.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597147.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189760.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597155.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189772.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597155.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189772.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083507.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189776.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083507.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189776.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083511.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189780.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083511.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189780.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083515.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189784.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083515.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001809189784.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597141.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868557.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597141.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868557.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597149.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868569.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597149.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868569.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132368216.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868573.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132368216.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868573.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083508.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868577.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083508.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868577.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083512.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868581.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083512.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855868581.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0095024494.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948581.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0095024494.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948581.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597143.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948589.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597143.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948589.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597151.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948597.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0097597151.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948597.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083503.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948605.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083503.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948605.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083509.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948609.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083509.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948609.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083513.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948613.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0175083513.png rename to docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001855948613.png diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001911643677.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001911643677.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90a03531 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0000001911643677.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0113597958.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0113597958.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df63fc46 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0113597958.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132912869.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132912869.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f98dcd0 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0132912869.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0139105429.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0139105429.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8f8c370e..00000000 Binary files a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0139105429.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152701021.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152701021.png index 925a0598..08f8422f 100644 Binary files a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152701021.png and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152701021.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152727234.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152727234.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35e28315 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0152727234.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0154391346.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0154391346.png index c032754e..f01b3fd6 100644 Binary files a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0154391346.png and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0154391346.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0162733605.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0162733605.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c30ba0d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0162733605.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153665.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153665.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53c82995 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153665.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153667.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153667.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2dafabd Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153667.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153668.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153668.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5eee04be Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153668.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153669.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153669.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d613661 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153669.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153670.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153670.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50829845 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153670.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153671.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153671.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ad33f35 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153671.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153672.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153672.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f99a107b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153672.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153673.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153673.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7c9dce1 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169153673.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443743.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443743.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..368a7aff Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443743.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443885.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443885.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c1714ef Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443885.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443887.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443887.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a200358a Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0169443887.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0197133828.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0197133828.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2995e60b Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0197133828.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205531351.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205531351.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1c2df008..00000000 Binary files a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205531351.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534009.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534009.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..693d5127 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534009.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534122.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534122.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27093d13 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0205534122.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0210779229.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0210779229.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1909444d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0210779229.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0216898618.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0216898618.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5470dea0 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0216898618.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0218677657.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0218677657.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07076905 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0218677657.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0232543567.gif b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0232543567.gif new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bdbbaec0 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0232543567.gif differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0275513364.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0275513364.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1909444d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0275513364.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0277693887.png b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0277693887.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6fb7d3d Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_image_0277693887.png differ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580741.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580741.html index 5d493f1d..8bf7a7ba 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580741.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580741.html @@ -1,21 +1,67 @@

What Is EVS?

-

Overview

Elastic Volume Service (EVS) offers scalable block storage for cloud servers. With high reliability, high performance, and a variety of specifications, EVS disks can be used for distributed file systems, development and test environments, data warehouses, and high-performance computing (HPC) applications. Cloud servers that EVS supports include Elastic Cloud Servers (ECSs) and Bare Metal Servers (BMSs).

+

Overview

Elastic Volume Service (EVS) offers scalable block storage for cloud servers. With high reliability, high performance, and a variety of specifications, EVS disks can be used for distributed file systems, development and test environments, data warehouses, and high-performance computing (HPC) applications. Cloud servers that EVS supports include Elastic Cloud Servers (ECSs) and BMS.

+

EVS disks are similar to hard disks in PCs. They must be attached to servers for use and cannot be used alone. You can initialize EVS disks, create file systems on them, and store data persistently on them.

EVS disks are sometimes just referred to as disks in this document.

Figure 1 EVS architecture
-

EVS Advantages

EVS has the following advantages:

-
  • Various disk types

    EVS provides a variety of disk types for you to choose from, and EVS disks can be used as data disks and system disks for serverss. You can select an appropriate disk type that best suits your budget and service requirements.

    -
  • Elastic scalability

    The EVS disk capacity ranges from 10 GiB to 32 TiB. When it no longer meets your needs, you can expand the disk capacity up to 32 TiB in increments of 1 GiB, without interrupting your applications.

    -

    Besides the disk capacity limit, the additional space you can add cannot exceed the remaining quota. You can increase the quota if the remaining quota is insufficient.

    -
  • High security and reliability
    • Both system disks and data disks support data encryption to ensure data security.
    • Data protection functions, such as backups and snapshots, safeguard the disk data, preventing incorrect data caused by application exceptions or attacks.
    -
  • Real-time monitoring

    On Cloud Eye, you can monitor the disk health and operating status at any time.

    -
+

EVS Advantages

EVS has the following advantages:

+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 EVS advantages

Advantage

+

Description

+

Related Knowledge

+

Various disk types

+

EVS provides a variety of disk types for you to choose from, and EVS disks can be used as data disks and system disks for servers. You can select an appropriate disk type that best suits your budget and service requirements.

+

Disk Types and Performance

+

Elastic scalability

+

The EVS disk capacity ranges from 10 GiB to 32 TiB. When it no longer meets your needs, you can expand the disk capacity up to 32 TiB in increments of 1 GiB, without interrupting your applications.

+

Expansion Overview

+

Besides the disk capacity limit, the additional space you can add cannot exceed the remaining quota. You can increase the quota if the remaining quota is insufficient.

+

Manage EVS Quotas

+

High security and reliability

+

Both system disks and data disks support data encryption to ensure data security.

+

EVS Encryption

+

Data protection functions, such as backups and snapshots, safeguard the disk data, preventing incorrect data caused by application exceptions or attacks.

+

EVS Backup

+

EVS Snapshot

+

Real-time monitoring

+

On Cloud Eye, you can monitor the disk health and operating status at any time.

+

Viewing EVS Monitoring Data

+
+

Differences Among EVS, SFS, and OBS

There are currently three types of storage available for you to choose from: EVS, Scalable File Service (SFS), and Object Storage Service (OBS). See their differences in the following table.

-
- + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0119.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0119.html index 331beb10..8527778d 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0119.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0119.html @@ -22,7 +22,11 @@ - + + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0120.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0120.html index 404aa3a7..e1364a3f 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0120.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0120.html @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Table 1 Differences among EVS, SFS, and OBS

Service

+
@@ -40,7 +86,7 @@ -
Table 2 Differences among EVS, SFS, and OBS

Service

Overall Introduction

  • HPC scenarios, such as gene sequencing, animation rendering, and CAD/CAE
  • File sharing
  • Media processing
  • Content management and web services
  • Offline file backup

SFS storage capacity is available on demand and can be expanded to a maximum of 2 PB.

+

SFS storage capacity is available on demand and can be expanded to a maximum of 2 PiB.

OBS

@@ -56,6 +102,11 @@
+

Methods of Access

The public cloud system provides a web-based management console and HTTPS-based APIs for you to access the EVS service.

+
  • APIs

    Use APIs if you need to integrate EVS into a third-party system for secondary development. For details, see Elastic Volume Service API Reference.

    +
  • Management console

    Use the management console if you do not need to integrate EVS with a third-party system. Log in to the management console and choose Elastic Volume Service from the service list.

    +
+

User Permissions

Users with resource management permissions can control the operations performed on cloud service resources. For EVS, a user with the Server Administrator permission can perform operations on EVS resources, including creating disks, deleting disks, and creating snapshots.

For details about user permissions, see Permissions.

diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580744.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580744.html index 46313d41..c7cc4f15 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580744.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0014580744.html @@ -2,125 +2,208 @@

Disk Types and Performance

EVS disks are classified based on the disk I/O performance. EVS disks differ in performance and price. Choose the disk type most appropriate for your applications.

-

Application Scenarios

  • Common I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 1,000 IOPS. They are suitable for applications that require large capacity, a medium read/write speed, and fewer transactions, such as enterprise office applications and small-scale test environments.
  • High I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 3,000 IOPS and a minimum of 6 ms read/write latency. They are designed to meet the needs of mainstream high-performance, high-reliability applications, such as enterprise applications, large-scale development and test environments, and web server logs.
  • Ultra-high I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 20,000 IOPS and a minimum of 1 ms read/write latency. They are excellent for read/write-intensive applications that require super-high I/O and bandwidth, such as distributed file systems in HPC scenarios or NoSQL/relational databases in I/O-intensive scenarios.
  • High I/O (Performance optimized I): This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 550 MiB/s throughput, which is higher than high I/O EVS disks. They are cost-effective and provide higher performance, optimizing both IOPS and bandwidth. Such disks are particularly suitable for mixed load scenarios consisting of online analytical processing (OLAP) and online transaction processing (OLTP) or consisting of large and small HPC files.
  • Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized): This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 1 GiB/s throughput and a minimum of 1 ms read/write latency. They can be used for enterprise mission-critical applications, such as SAP HANA.
  • Extreme SSD: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum of 128,000 IOPS. They are designed for workloads demanding super-high bandwidth and super-low latency, such as Oracle databases and AI applications.
    • High I/O (performance optimized I) and ultra-high I/O (latency optimized) EVS disks can only be attached to SAP HANA ECSs or HL1 ECSs.
    • If an Extreme SSD disk is attached to a BMS, it can reach a maximum IOPS of 128,000. If it is attached to an ECS, it can reach a maximum IOPS of 100,000 due to I/O queue limitations.
    +

    Application Scenarios

    • Common I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum IOPS of 1,000. They are suitable for applications that require large capacity, a medium read/write speed, and fewer transactions, such as enterprise office applications and small-scale test environments.
    • High I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum IOPS of 3,000 and a minimum read/write latency of 6 ms. They are designed to meet the needs of mainstream high-performance, high-reliability applications, such as enterprise applications, large-scale development and test environments, and web server logs.
    • Ultra-high I/O: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum IOPS of 20,000 and a minimum read/write latency of 1 ms. They are excellent for read/write-intensive applications that require super-high I/O and bandwidth, such as distributed file systems in HPC scenarios or NoSQL/relational databases in I/O-intensive scenarios.
    • Extreme SSD: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum IOPS of 128,000. They are designed for workloads demanding super-high bandwidth and super-low latency, such as Oracle databases and AI applications.
    • General Purpose SSD: This type of EVS disks delivers a maximum IOPS of 20,000. They are suitable for workloads requiring high throughput and low latency, such as enterprise OA, development and testing, web server logging, containers, and high-performance system disks.
    +
    • If an Extreme SSD disk is attached to a BMS, it can reach a maximum IOPS of 128,000. If it is attached to an ECS, it can reach a maximum IOPS of 100,000 due to I/O queue limitations.
    -
+

EVS Performance

EVS performance metrics include:
  • IOPS: Number of read/write operations performed by an EVS disk per second
  • Throughput: Amount of data read from and written into an EVS disk per second
  • Read/write I/O latency: Minimum interval between two consecutive read/write operations on an EVS disk
-

-
- - - @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0101.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0101.html index cb701824..e6d07b66 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0101.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0101.html @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@
diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0102.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0102.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7507bb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0102.html @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + +

EVS Concepts

+
+
Table 1 EVS performance data

Parameter

+
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 EVS performance data

Parameter

Common I/O

+

Common I/O

High I/O

+

High I/O

Ultra-high I/O

+

General Purpose SSD

High I/O (Performance optimized I)

+

Ultra-high I/O

Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized)

-

Extreme SSD

+

Extreme SSD

IOPS per GiB/EVS disk

+

IOPS per GiB/EVS disk

1

+

1

2

+

2

50

+

12

6

+

50

50

-

50

+

50

Min. IOPS/EVS disk

+

Min. IOPS/EVS disk

100

+

100

100

+

100

100

+

1,800

1,200

+

100

1,500

-

1,800

+

1,800

Max. IOPS/EVS disk

+

Max. IOPS/EVS disk

1,000

+

1,000

3,000

+

3,000

20,000

+

20,000

5,000

+

20,000

33,000

-

128,000

+

128,000

IOPS burst limit/EVS disk

+

Disk IOPS

1,000

+

Min. (1,000, 100 + 1 x Capacity)

3,000

+

Min. (3,000, 100 + 2 x Capacity)

10,000

+

Min. (20,000, 1,800 + 12 x Capacity)

5,000

+

Min. (20,000, 100 + 50 x Capacity)

16,000

-

64,000

+

Min. (128,000, 1,800 + 50 x Capacity)

Max. throughput

+

IOPS burst limit/EVS disk

90 MiB/s

+

2,200

150 MiB/s

+

3,000

350 MiB/s

+

8,000

550 MiB/s

+

10,000

1 GiB/s

-

1,000 MiB/s

+

64,000

Read/write I/O latency

-
NOTE:

This parameter specifies the single-queue access latencies of EVS disks.

-
+

Max. throughput

10 ms to 15 ms

+

90 MiB/s

6 ms to 10 ms

+

150 MiB/s

1 ms to 3 ms

+

250 MiB/s

6 ms to 10 ms

+

350 MiB/s

1 ms

+

1,000 MiB/s

Sub-millisecond

+

Disk throughput (MiB/s)

+

50

+

Min. (150, 100 + 0.15 × Capacity)

+

Min. (250, 100 + 0.5 × Capacity)

+

Min. (350, 120 + 0.5 × Capacity)

+

Min. (1,000, 120 + 0.5 × Capacity)

+

I/O read/write latency (single-queue)

+

10 ms to 15 ms

+

6 ms to 10 ms

+

1 ms

+

1 ms to 3 ms

+

Sub-millisecond

+

EVS disk performance is closely related with the data block size:

+
  • If data blocks are of the same size, a disk can achieve either the maximum IOPS or maximum throughput depending on which one is reached first.
  • If data blocks are of different sizes, the maximum performance metric that a disk can achieve varies:
    • For small data blocks, such as 4 KiB or 8 KiB, a disk can reach the maximum IOPS.
    • For data blocks greater than or equal to 16 KiB, a disk can reach the maximum throughput.
    +
+

The following uses an ultra-high I/O disk as an example. According to the formula, when the size of an ultra-high I/O disk is greater than or equal to 460 GiB, the disk theoretically can reach either the maximum IOPS 20,000 or the maximum throughput 350 MiB/s. However, this is not the case in practice. The maximum IOPS and maximum throughput that a disk can reach also vary with the data block size. For details, see Table 2.

+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 2 Maximum performance of an ultra-high I/O EVS disk

Data Block Size

+

Max. IOPS

+

Max. Throughput (MiB/s)

+

4 KiB

+

About 20,000

+

About 78

+

8 KiB

+

About 20,000

+

About 156

+

16 KiB

+

About 20,000

+

About 312

+

32 KiB

+

About 11,200

+

About 350

+
+
+ +

Disk IOPS Calculation Formula

Disk IOPS = Min. (Maximum IOPS, Minimum IOPS + IOPS per GiB x Capacity)

+
The following example uses an ultra-high I/O EVS disk with a maximum IOPS of 20,000.
  • If the disk capacity is 100 GiB, the disk IOPS is calculated as follows: Disk IOPS = Min. (20,000, 100 + 50 × 100)

    +

    The disk IOPS is 5,100, the smaller value between 20,000 and 5,100.

    +
  • If the disk capacity is 1,000 GiB, the disk IOPS is calculated as follows: Disk IOPS = Min. (20,000, 100 + 50 × 1,000)

    +

    The disk IOPS is 20,000, the smaller value between 20,000 and 50,100.

    +
+
+
+

Disk Burst Capability and Principles

EVS disks have burst capability, which allows a small-capacity disk to surpass its maximum IOPS within a certain period of time. This IOPS applies to individual disks.

+

Disks with burst capability are well-suited for speeding up server startup. In most cases, system disks have small capacities. For example, the IOPS of a 50-GiB ultra-high I/O disk without burst capability can only reach up to 2,600, calculated as follows: IOPS = Min. (20,000, 100 + 50 x Capacity). If the disk has burst capability, its IOPS can burst up to 10,000.

+
The following example uses an ultra-high I/O EVS disk with the IOPS burst limit of 10,000.
  • If the disk capacity is 100 GiB, the disk has a maximum IOPS of 5,100, but it can burst to 10,000 IOPS in a certain duration.
  • If the disk capacity is 1,000 GiB, the disk has a maximum IOPS of 20,000. The disk maximum IOPS already exceeds its burst IOPS 10,000, and the disk does not use the burst capability.
+
+

The following describes the burst IOPS consumption and reservation.

+

A token bucket is used to handle burst I/O operations. The number of initial tokens in the bucket is calculated as follows:

+

Number of initial tokens = Burst duration x IOPS burst limit

+
In the following example, a 100-GiB ultra-high I/O EVS disk is used, and the fixed burst duration is 1800s. Therefore, the number of initial tokens is 18,000,000 (1,800 x 10,000).
  • Token production rate: This rate equals the disk maximum IOPS, which is 5,100 tokens/s.
  • Token consumption rate: This rate is calculated based on the I/O usage. Each I/O request consumes a token. The maximum consumption rate is 10,000 tokens/s, which is the larger value between the disk burst IOPS and maximum IOPS.
+
+

Consumption principles

+

When the token consumption rate is greater than the production rate, the number of tokens decreases accordingly, and eventually the disk IOPS will be consistent with the token production rate (the maximum IOPS). In this example, the disk can burst for approximately 3,673 seconds [18,000,000/(10,000 - 5,100)].

+

Reservation principles

+

When the token consumption rate is smaller than the production rate, the number of tokens increases accordingly, enabling the disk to regain the burst capability. In this example, if the disk is suspended for approximately 3,529 seconds (18,000,000/5,100), the token bucket will be filled up with tokens.

+

As long as there are tokens in the token bucket, the disk has the burst capability.

+
+
Figure 1 shows the token consumption and reservation principles. The blue bars indicate the disk IOPS usage, the green dashed line represents the maximum IOPS, the red dashed line indicates the IOPS burst limit, and the black curve indicates the changes of the number of tokens.
  • When the number of tokens is greater than zero, the disk IOPS can exceed 5,100 and has the capability to reach 10,000, the IOPS burst limit.
  • When the number of tokens is zero, the disk does not have the burst capability, and the maximum IOPS is 5,100.
  • When the disk IOPS is less than 5,100, the number of tokens starts to increase, and the disk can regain the burst capability.
+
Figure 1 Burst capability diagram
+
+
+

Performance Test Method

For details about how to test the EVS disk performance parameters, see How Can I Test My Disk Performance?.

diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0017616396.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0017616396.html index bbe57aa0..30e651e3 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0017616396.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0017616396.html @@ -1,25 +1,26 @@

Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2008)

-

Scenarios

After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.

+

Scenarios

After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.

In Windows, you must allocate the additional space to an existing partition or a new partition.

-
This section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise 64bit as the sample OS to describe the expansion methods:
  • For a system disk: -
  • For a data disk: +

    If the disk capacity is expanded on a stopped server, the additional space of a Windows system disk or Windows data disk will be automatically added to the partition at the end of the disk upon the server startup. In this case, the additional space can be used directly.

    +
    This section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise 64bit as the sample OS to describe the expansion methods:

    The method for allocating the additional space varies with the server OS. This section is used for reference only. For detailed operations and differences, see the corresponding OS documents.

    -

    Performing the expansion operations with caution. Misoperation may lead to data loss or exceptions. Therefore, you are advised to back up the disk data using CBR or snapshots before expansion. For details about using CBR, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about using snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

    +

    Performing the expansion operations with caution. Incorrect operations may lead to data loss or exceptions. So you are advised to back up the disk data using CBR or snapshots before expansion. For details about using CBR, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about using snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

    -

    Prerequisites

    • You have expanded the disk capacity and attached the disk to a server on the management console. For details, see Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk or Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk.
    • You have logged in to the server.
      • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
      • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
      +

      Prerequisites

      -

      System Disk: Add Additional Space to Volume (C:)

      In this example, the system disk has 50 GiB originally, and 22 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to add this 22 GiB to volume (C:) on the server. After the operation is complete, volume (C:) will have 72 GiB of capacity and can be used as a system volume.

      -
      1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

        The Server Manager window is displayed.

        +

        System Disk: Add the Additional Space to the Original Volume

        In this example, the system disk has 50 GiB originally, and 22 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to add this 22 GiB to volume (C:) on the server. After the operation is complete, volume (C:) will have 72 GiB of capacity and can be used as a system volume.

        +
        1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

          The Server Manager window is displayed.

        2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

          The Disk Management window is displayed.

          Figure 1 Disk Management (system disk)
          -

          If you cannot view the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

          +

          If you cannot see the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

        3. On the Disk Management page, select the disk and volume that you want to extend. The current volume size and unallocated space are displayed.
        4. Right-click the target volume and choose Extend Volume.

          Figure 2 Choosing Extend Volume

        5. On the displayed Extend Volume Wizard window, click Next.

          Figure 3 Extend Volume Wizard
          @@ -28,48 +29,68 @@

      -

      System Disk: Create New Volume (F:) with Additional Space

      In this example, the system disk has 40 GiB originally, and 60 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to use this 60 GiB to create a new volume, for example volume (F:), on the server. After the operation is complete, new volume (F:) has 60 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

      -
      1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

        The Server Manager window is displayed.

        -

      2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

        The Disk Management window is displayed.
        Figure 6 Refresh (system disk)
        +

        System Disk: Create a New Volume with the Additional Space

        In this example, the system disk has 40 GiB originally, and 60 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to use this 60 GiB to create a new volume, for example volume (F:), on the server. After the operation is complete, new volume (F:) has 60 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

        +
        1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

          The Server Manager window is displayed.

          +

        2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

          The Disk Management window is displayed.
          Figure 6 Refresh (system disk)
          -

        3. If you cannot view the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

          After the refresh, the additional space is displayed in the right area and is unallocated.

          +

        4. If you cannot see the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

          After the refresh, the additional space is displayed in the right area and is unallocated.

          Figure 7 Unallocated disk space (system disk)

        5. In the Unallocated area of Disk 0, right-click the blank area and choose New Simple Volume.

          Figure 8 New Simple Volume (system disk)
          -

        6. On the displayed New Simple Volume Wizard window, click Next.

          Figure 9 New Simple Volume Wizard (system disk)
          +

        7. On the displayed New Simple Volume Wizard window, click Next.

          Figure 9 New Simple Volume Wizard (system disk)

        8. On the displayed Specify Volume Size page, set Simple volume size in MB and click Next. In this example, the default size is used.

          Figure 10 Specify Volume Size (system disk)
          -

        9. On the displayed Assign Drive Letter and Path page, click Assign the following drive letter, select a drive letter, and click Next. In this example, drive letter F is selected.

          Figure 11 Assign Driver Letter or Path (system disk)
          +

        10. On the displayed Assign Drive Letter and Path page, click Assign the following drive letter, select a drive letter, and click Next. In this example, drive letter F is selected.

          Figure 11 Assign Drive Letter or Path (system disk)

        11. On the displayed Format Partition page, click Format this volume with the following settings, set parameters based on the requirements, and select Perform a quick format. Then, click Next.

          Figure 12 Format Partition (system disk)
          -

        12. Click Finish.

          After the expansion succeeded, new volume (F:) is displayed.
          Figure 13 Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard (new volume F:)
          +

        13. Click Finish.

          After the expansion succeeded, new volume (F:) is displayed.
          Figure 13 Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard (new volume F:)
          Figure 14 New Volume (F:)

        -

        Data Disk: Add Additional Space to Volume (D:)

        In this example, the data disk has 100 GiB originally, and 50 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to add this 50 GiB to volume (D:) on the server. After the operation is complete, volume (D:) has 150 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

        -
        1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

          The Server Manager window is displayed.

          -

        2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

          The Disk Management window is displayed.
          Figure 15 Disk Management (data disk)
          -

          If you cannot view the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

          -
          +

          System Disk: Create a New Volume Using the Available Space Shrunk from the Original Volume

          In this example, the system disk has 40 GiB originally, and 60 GiB is added on the management console and then formatted and added to volume (C:). This 60 GiB has not been used.

          +

          The following procedure describes how to use the shrink function to create new volume (D:) with this 60 GiB. After the operation is complete, new volume (D:) can be used as a data volume.

          +
          1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

            The Server Manager window is displayed.

            +

          2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

            The Disk Management window is displayed.
            Figure 15 Refresh (shrink volume)
            -

          3. On the Disk Management page, select the disk and volume that you want to extend. The current volume size and unallocated space are displayed.
          4. Right-click the target volume and choose Extend Volume.

            Figure 16 Choosing Extend Volume (Windows Server 2008)
            -

          5. On the displayed Extend Volume Wizard window, click Next.

            Figure 17 Extend Volume Wizard (Windows Server 2008)
            -

          6. In the text box to the right of Select the amount of space in MB, enter the amount of the additional space and click Next.

            Figure 18 Selecting space (Windows Server 2008)
            -

          7. Click Finish.

            After the expansion succeeded, the partition size is larger than the original size.
            Figure 19 Capacity expansion succeeded (Windows Server 2008)
            +

          8. In the (C:) area of Disk 0, right-click the blank area and choose Shrink Volume.

            Figure 16 Shrink Volume
            +

          9. The system automatically queries the available shrink space. In the displayed dialog box, enter the available space and click Shrink.

            In this example, the volume available space is 60 GiB. Therefore, enter 61440 (60 × 1024 MiB).

            +
            Figure 17 Shrink (shrink volume)
            +
            After the operation is complete, Disk 0 has 60 GiB unallocated space.
            Figure 18 Unallocated (shrink volume)
            +
            +

          10. In the Unallocated area of Disk 0, right-click the blank area and choose New Simple Volume.

            Figure 19 New Simple Volume (shrink volume)
            +

          11. On the displayed New Simple Volume Wizard window, click Next.

            Figure 20 New Simple Volume Wizard (shrink volume)
            +

          12. On the displayed Specify Volume Size page, set Simple volume size in MB and click Next. In this example, the default size is used.

            Figure 21 Specify Volume Size (shrink volume)
            +

          13. On the displayed Assign Drive Letter and Path page, click Assign the following drive letter, select a drive letter, and click Next. In this example, drive letter D is selected.

            Figure 22 Assign Drive Letter or Path (shrink volume)
            +

          14. On the displayed Format Partition page, click Format this volume with the following settings, set parameters based on the requirements, and select Perform a quick format. Then, click Next.

            Figure 23 Format Partition (shrink volume)
            +

          15. Click Finish.

            After the expansion succeeded, new volume (D:) is displayed.
            Figure 24 Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard (new volume D:)
            +
            Figure 25 New Volume (D:)

          -

          Data Disk: Create New Volume (E:) with Additional Space

          In this example, the data disk has 40 GiB originally, and 60 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to use this 60 GiB to create a new volume, for example volume (E:), on the server. After the operation is complete, new volume (E:) has 60 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

          -
          1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

            The Server Manager window is displayed.

            -

          2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

            The Disk Management window is displayed.
            Figure 20 Refresh (data disk)
            +

            Data Disk: Add the Additional Space to the Original Volume

            In this example, the data disk has 100 GiB originally, and 50 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to add this 50 GiB to volume (D:) on the server. After the operation is complete, volume (D:) has 150 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

            +
            1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

              The Server Manager window is displayed.

              +

            2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

              The Disk Management window is displayed.
              Figure 26 Disk Management (data disk)
              +

              If you cannot see the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

              +
              -

            3. If you cannot view the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

              After the refresh, the additional space is displayed in the right area and is unallocated.

              -
              Figure 21 Unallocated disk space (data disk)
              -

            4. In the Unallocated area of Disk 1, right-click the blank area and choose New Simple Volume.

              Figure 22 New Simple Volume (data disk)
              -

            5. On the displayed New Simple Volume Wizard window, click Next.

              Figure 23 New Simple Volume Wizard (data disk)
              -

            6. On the displayed Specify Volume Size page, set Simple volume size in MB and click Next. In this example, the default size is used.

              Figure 24 Specify Volume Size (data disk)
              -

            7. On the displayed Assign Drive Letter and Path page, click Assign the following drive letter, select a drive letter, and click Next. In this example, drive letter E is selected.

              Figure 25 Assign Driver Letter or Path (data disk)
              -

            8. On the displayed Format Partition page, click Format this volume with the following settings, set parameters based on the requirements, and select Perform a quick format. Then, click Next.

              Figure 26 Format Partition (data disk)
              -

            9. Click Finish.

              After the expansion succeeded, new volume (E:) is displayed.
              Figure 27 Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard (new volume E:)
              -
              Figure 28 New Volume (E:)
              +

            10. On the Disk Management page, select the disk and volume that you want to extend. The current volume size and unallocated space are displayed.
            11. Right-click the target volume and choose Extend Volume.

              Figure 27 Choosing Extend Volume (Windows Server 2008)
              +

            12. On the displayed Extend Volume Wizard window, click Next.

              Figure 28 Extend Volume Wizard (Windows Server 2008)
              +

            13. In the text box to the right of Select the amount of space in MB, enter the amount of the additional space and click Next.

              Figure 29 Selecting space (Windows Server 2008)
              +

            14. Click Finish.

              After the expansion succeeded, the partition size is larger than the original size.
              Figure 30 Capacity expansion succeeded (Windows Server 2008)
              +
              +

            +
            +

            Data Disk: Create a New Volume with the Additional Space

            In this example, the data disk has 40 GiB originally, and 60 GiB is added on the management console. The following procedure describes how to use this 60 GiB to create a new volume, for example volume (E:), on the server. After the operation is complete, new volume (E:) has 60 GiB of capacity and can be used as a data volume.

            +
            1. On the desktop of the server, right-click Computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.

              The Server Manager window is displayed.

              +

            2. In the navigation tree, choose Storage > Disk Management.

              The Disk Management window is displayed.
              Figure 31 Refresh (data disk)
              +
              +

            3. If you cannot see the additional space, right-click Disk Management and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu.

              After the refresh, the additional space is displayed in the right area and is unallocated.

              +
              Figure 32 Unallocated disk space (data disk)
              +

            4. In the Unallocated area of Disk 1, right-click the blank area and choose New Simple Volume.

              Figure 33 New Simple Volume (data disk)
              +

            5. On the displayed New Simple Volume Wizard window, click Next.

              Figure 34 New Simple Volume Wizard (data disk)
              +

            6. On the displayed Specify Volume Size page, set Simple volume size in MB and click Next. In this example, the default size is used.

              Figure 35 Specify Volume Size (data disk)
              +

            7. On the displayed Assign Drive Letter and Path page, click Assign the following drive letter, select a drive letter, and click Next. In this example, drive letter E is selected.

              Figure 36 Assign Drive Letter or Path (data disk)
              +

            8. On the displayed Format Partition page, click Format this volume with the following settings, set parameters based on the requirements, and select Perform a quick format. Then, click Next.

              Figure 37 Format Partition (data disk)
              +

            9. Click Finish.

              After the expansion succeeded, new volume (E:) is displayed.
              Figure 38 Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard (new volume E:)
              +
              Figure 39 New Volume (E:)

            diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0021738346.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0021738346.html index baf407ce..2e2b466f 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0021738346.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0021738346.html @@ -1,123 +1,147 @@

            Create an EVS Disk

            -

            Scenarios

            EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers.

            -
            • System disks can only be created together with servers and are automatically attached.
            • A system disk can have a maximum of 1,024 GiB, and a data disk 32,768 GiB.
            • Data disks that created together with servers are automatically attached.
            • After servers are created, any data disks added on the cloud server console are automatically attached.
            • After servers are created, any data disks added on the EVS console need to be manually attached.
            -

            This section describes how to separately create disks on the EVS console.

            +

            Scenarios

            EVS disks can be used as system disks or data disks for servers. You can create data disks on the EVS console, or create them together with system disks on the ECS console.

            +

            This section describes how to create data disks on the EVS console.

            +
            +

            Constraints

            +
            + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
            Table 1 Constraints on creating disks

            Created On

            +

            Description

            +

            The EVS console

            +
            • Disks created on the EVS console are data disks. You need to manually attach them to servers.
            • Disks can only be attached to servers in the same region and AZ. Once created, the region and AZ cannot be changed.
            • There are quantity and capacity quotas on EVS disks, so properly plan the number of disks and total disk capacity your workloads require. For details, see Manage EVS Quotas.
            +

            The ECS console

            +
            • System disks can only be created together with servers and are automatically attached.
            • Data disks created together with servers or added after the server creation are automatically attached.
            • Disks will have the same billing mode as their server if the disks are created together with the server.
            • By default, disks created with ECSs are VBD disks, and those created with BMSs are SCSI disks.
            +

            -

            +

            Capacities of multiple disks cannot be combined, and the capacity of a single disk cannot be split.

            +
            +

            Procedure

            1. Log in to the management console.
            2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
            3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

              The disk list page is displayed.

            4. Click Create Disk.

              • Figure 1 shows the parameter setting of non-encrypted disks.
                Figure 1 Non-encrypted disks
              • Figure 2 shows the parameter setting of encrypted disks.
                Figure 2 Encrypted disks
              -

            5. Configure basic disk information according to Table 1.

              -

              -
              Table 1 Disk parameters

              Parameter

              +

            6. Configure basic disk information according to Table 2.

              +

              - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
              Table 2 Disk parameters

              Parameter

              Description

              +

              Description

              Example Value

              +

              Example Value

              Region

              +

              Region

              Mandatory

              +

              Mandatory

              Resources are region-specific and cannot be used across regions through internal network connections. For low network latency and quick resource access, select the nearest region.

              eu-de

              +

              eu-de

              AZ

              +

              AZ

              Mandatory

              +

              Mandatory

              The availability zone (AZ) where you want to create the disk.

              NOTE:
              • Disks can only be attached to the servers in the same AZ.
              • The AZ of a disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.

              eu-de-1

              +

              eu-de-1

              Disk Type

              +

              Disk Specifications

              Mandatory

              -
              • Common I/O
              • High I/O
              • Ultra-high I/O
              • High I/O (Performance optimized I)
              • Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized)
              • Extreme SSD
              +

              Mandatory

              +
              • Common I/O
              • High I/O
              • Ultra-high I/O
              • General Purpose SSD
              • Extreme SSD
              NOTE:
              • When disks are created from backups:

                If the disk type of the backup's source disk is common I/O, high I/O, or ultra-high I/O, you can create disks of any of these types.

                -

                If the disk type of the backup's source disk is high I/O (performance optimized I) or ultra-high I/O (latency optimized), you can create disks of any of the two types.

              • When a disk is created from a snapshot, the disk type of the new disk will be consistent with that of the snapshot's source disk.
              • For more information about disk types, see Disk Types and Performance.

              Common I/O

              +

              Common I/O

              Disk Size (GiB)

              +

              Disk Size (GiB)

              Mandatory

              +

              Mandatory

              The disk size. Only data disks can be created on the current page, and the disk size ranges from 10 GiB to 32,768 GiB.

              -
              NOTE:
              • When you use a backup to create a disk, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the backup size. In the condition that you do not specify the disk capacity, if the backup size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default capacity 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the backup size is greater than 10 GiB, the disk capacity will be consistent with the backup size.
              • When you use a snapshot to create a disk, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the snapshot size. In the condition that you do not specify the disk capacity, if the snapshot size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default capacity 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the snapshot size is greater than 10 GiB, the disk capacity will be consistent with the snapshot size.
              +
              NOTE:
              • When you use a backup to create a disk, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the backup size. In the condition that you do not specify the disk capacity, if the backup size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default capacity 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the backup size is greater than 10 GiB, the disk capacity will be consistent with the backup size.
              • When you use a snapshot to create a disk, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the snapshot size. In the condition that you do not specify a disk capacity, if the snapshot size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the snapshot size is greater than 10 GiB, the disk capacity will be consistent with the snapshot size.

              20 GiB

              +

              20 GiB

              Create from backup

              +

              Create from backup

              Optional

              +

              Optional

              Specifies to create the disk from a backup.

              -

              Click Select Data Source and choose Create from backup. On the displayed page, select the target backup and click OK.

              +

              Click Select Data Source and choose Create from backup. On the displayed page, select the target backup and click OK.

              NOTE:
              • You can select a backup created by the current tenant or shared with the current tenant by another tenant.
              • One backup cannot be used for concurrent disk creation operations at the same time. For example, if you are creating disk A from a backup, this backup can be used to create another disk only after disk A has been created.
              • If a disk is created from a backup of a system disk, the new disk can be used as a data disk only.

              autobackup-001

              +

              autobackup-001

              Create from snapshot

              +

              Create from snapshot

              Optional

              +

              Optional

              Specifies to create the disk from a snapshot.

              -

              Click Select Data Source and choose Create from snapshot. On the displayed page, select the target snapshot and click OK.

              +

              Click Select Data Source and choose Create from snapshot. On the displayed page, select the target snapshot and click OK.

              NOTE:
              • The disk type of the new disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk.
              • The device type of the new disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk.
              • The encryption attribute of the new disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk.

              For details about the disk creation from snapshots, see Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot.

              snapshot-001

              +

              snapshot-001

              Auto Backup

              +

              Auto Backup

              Optional

              +

              Optional

              If auto backup is enabled, the system automatically creates backups for the disk at specified time points and deletes outdated backups according to the configured backup policy.

              When Enable is selected, a backup policy must be configured. You can either use the default backup policy or customize the policy based on your service requirements.

              NOTE:

              For details about the backup policy, see Managing EVS Backups.

              -

              +

              -

              Share

              +

              Share

              Optional

              -
              • If Share is not selected, a common disk is created.
              • If Share is selected, a shared disk is created, and the shared disk can be attached to multiple servers.
              -

              If both SCSI and Share are selected, a shared SCSI disk is created.

              +

              Optional

              +
              • If Share is not selected, a common disk is created.
              • If Share is selected, a shared disk is created, and the shared disk can be attached to multiple servers.
              +

              If you select both SCSI and Share, a shared SCSI disk is created.

              NOTE:

              The sharing attribute of a disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.

              For details about shared EVS disks, see Managing Shared EVS Disks.

              -

              +

              -

              SCSI

              +

              SCSI

              Optional

              -
              • If you do not select SCSI, a VBD disk is created. VBD is the default device type of EVS disks.
              • If you select SCSI, a SCSI disk is created. Such disks allow the server OS to directly access the underlying storage media and send SCSI commands to the disks.
              +

              Optional

              +
              • If you do not select SCSI, a VBD disk is created. VBD is the default device type of EVS disks.
              • If you select SCSI, a SCSI disk is created. Such disks allow the server OS to directly access the underlying storage media and send SCSI commands to the disks.
              NOTE:

              The device type of a disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.

              For details about the ECS types, OSs, and ECS software supported by SCSI EVS disks, see Device Types and Usage Instructions.

              -

              +

              -

              Encryption

              +

              Encryption

              Optional

              +

              Optional

              Disk encryption is used for data disk encryption only. System disk encryption relies on the image. For details, see the Image Management Service User Guide.

              To use the disk encryption function, select Encryption. The displayed dialog box contains the following parameters:

              • Create Agency

                An agency is a trust relationship between two tenants or services. A tenant can create an agency to grant resource access rights to another tenant or service. If the KMS access rights are not granted to EVS, the Create Agency dialog box will be displayed. Otherwise, it will not be displayed.

                @@ -126,56 +150,56 @@
              • KMS Key Name
                NOTE:

                KMS Key Name is displayed only after the KMS access rights have been granted. For details, see "Create Agency" above.

                -
                KMS Key Name is the identifier of the key, and you can use KMS Key Name to specify the KMS key that is to be used for encryption. One of the following keys can be used:
                • Default Master Key: After the KMS access rights have been granted to EVS, the system automatically creates a Default Master Key and names it evs/default.
                • CMKs: Existing or newly created CMKs. For details, see Management > Creating a CMK in the Key Management Service User Guide.
                +
                KMS Key Name is the identifier of the key, and you can use KMS Key Name to specify a KMS key and use it for encryption. One of the following keys can be used:
                • Default Master Key: After the KMS access rights have been granted to EVS, the system automatically creates a Default Master Key evs/default.
                • CMKs: Existing or newly created CMKs. For details, see Management > Creating a CMK in the Key Management Service User Guide.
              NOTE:
              • Before you use the encryption function, KMS access rights need to be granted to EVS. If you have the right to grant the permission, grant the KMS access rights to EVS directly. If you do not have this permission, contact a user with the security administrator rights to grant KMS access rights to EVS, then repeat the preceding operations.
              • The encryption attribute of a disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.

              For details, see EVS Encryption.

              -

              +

              -

              Tag

              +

              Tag

              Optional

              +

              Optional

              During the EVS disk creation, you can tag the EVS resources. Tags identify cloud resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.

              A tag is composed of a key-value pair.
              • Key: Mandatory if the disk is going to be tagged
                • Must be unique for each resource.
                • Can contain a maximum of 36 characters.
                • Can contain only digits, letters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
              • Value: Optional if the disk is going to be tagged
                • Can contain a maximum of 43 characters.
                • Can contain only digits, letters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
              -
              NOTE:
              • A maximum of 10 tags can be added for an EVS disk.
              • Tag keys of the same EVS disk must be unique.
              • Except for tagging the disk during disk creation, you can also add, modify, or delete tags for existing disks. For details, see Managing a Tag.
              +
              NOTE:
              • A maximum of 10 tags can be added for an EVS disk.
              • Tag keys of the same EVS disk must be unique.
              • Except for tagging the disk during disk creation, you can also add, modify, or delete tags for existing disks. For details, see Manage EVS Tags.

              For details about tags, see the Tag Management Service User Guide.

              -

              +

              -

              Disk Name

              +

              Disk Name

              Mandatory

              +

              Mandatory

              • If you create disks individually, this parameter value is used as the actual disk name.

                The name can contain a maximum of 64 characters.

              • If you create disks in a batch, this parameter value is used as the prefix of disk names, and one disk name will be composed of this parameter value and a four-digit number.

                The name can contain a maximum of 59 characters.

              For example, if you create two disks and set volume for Disk Name, the EVS disk names will be volume-0001 and volume-0002.

              +

              For example, if you create two disks and set volume for Disk Name, the EVS disk names will be volume-0001 and volume-0002.

              Quantity

              +

              Quantity

              Optional

              -

              The number of disks to be created. The default value is set to 1, which means only one disk is created. Currently, you can create up to 100 disks at a time.

              -
              NOTE:
              • If the disk is created from a backup, batch creation is not possible, and this parameter must be set to 1.
              • If the disk is created from a snapshot, batch creation is not possible, and this parameter must be set to 1.
              +

              Optional

              +

              The number of disks to be created. The default value is set to 1, which means only one disk is created. Currently, you can create up to 100 disks at a time.

              +
              NOTE:
              • If the disk is created from a backup, batch creation is not possible, and this parameter must be set to 1.
              • If the disk is created from a snapshot, batch creation is not possible, and this parameter must be set to 1.

              1

              +

              1

            7. Click Create Now.
            8. On the Details page, check the disk details.

              • If you do not need to modify the specifications, click Submit.
              • If you need to modify the specifications, click Previous.
              -

            9. Go back to the disk list page and view the disk status.

              When the disk status changes to Available, the disk is successfully created.

              +

            10. In the disk list, view the disk status.

              When the disk status changes to Available, the disk is successfully created.

            11. diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0032860759.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0032860759.html index 45addc7d..9f134571 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0032860759.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0032860759.html @@ -1,24 +1,24 @@

              Shared EVS Disks and Usage Instructions

              -

              What Are Shared EVS Disks?

              Shared EVS disks are block storage devices that support concurrent read/write operations and can be attached to multiple servers. Shared EVS disks feature multiple attachments, high-concurrency, high-performance, and high-reliability. They are usually used for enterprise business-critical applications that require cluster deployment. Multiple servers can access the same shared EVS disk at the same time.

              +

              What Are Shared EVS Disks?

              Shared EVS disks are block storage devices that support concurrent read/write operations and can be attached to multiple servers. Shared EVS disks feature multiple attachments, high-concurrency, high-performance, and high-reliability. They are usually used for enterprise business-critical applications that require cluster deployment and high availability (HA). Multiple servers can access the same shared EVS disk at the same time.

              A shared EVS disk can be attached to a maximum of 16 servers. Servers that EVS supports include ECSs and BMSs. To share files, you need to deploy a shared file system or a cluster management system, such as Windows MSCS, Veritas VCS, or CFS.

              You must set up a shared file system or cluster management system before using shared EVS disks. If you directly attach a disk to multiple servers, the sharing function will not work and data may be overwritten.

              Figure 1 Application scenario of shared EVS disks
              -

              Usage Precautions

              Because most cluster applications, such as Windows MSCS, Veritas VCS, and Veritas CFS, require SCSI reservations, you are advised to use shared EVS disks with SCSI. If a SCSI EVS disk is attached to a Xen ECS for use, you must install the driver. For details, see Device Types and Usage Instructions.

              -
              You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach the shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.
              • Shared VBD EVS disks: The device type of a newly created shared EVS disk is VBD by default. Such disks can be used as virtual block storage devices, but do not support SCSI reservations. If SCSI reservations are required for your applications, create shared SCSI EVS disks.
              • Shared SCSI EVS disks: These EVS disks support SCSI reservations.
                • To improve data security, you are advised to use SCSI reservations together with the anti-affinity policy of an ECS group. That said, ensure that shared SCSI EVS disks are only attached to ECSs in the same anti-affinity ECS group.
                • If an ECS does not belong to any anti-affinity ECS group, you are advised not to attach shared SCSI EVS disks to this ECS. Otherwise, SCSI reservations may not work properly, which may put your data at risk.
                +

                Usage Precautions

                Because most cluster applications, such as Windows MSCS, Veritas VCS, and Veritas CFS, require SCSI reservations, you are advised to use shared EVS disks with SCSI. If a SCSI EVS disk is attached to a Xen ECS, you must install the driver. For details, see Device Types and Usage Instructions.

                +
                You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach a shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.
                • Shared VBD disks: The device type of a newly created shared disk is VBD by default. Such disks can be used as virtual block storage devices, but do not support SCSI reservations. If SCSI reservations are required for your applications, create shared SCSI EVS disks.
                • Shared SCSI disks: Such disks support SCSI reservations.
                  • To improve data security, you are advised to use SCSI reservations together with the anti-affinity policy of an ECS group. That said, ensure that shared SCSI disks are only attached to ECSs in the same anti-affinity ECS group.
                  • If an ECS does not belong to any anti-affinity ECS group, you are advised not to attach shared SCSI disks to this ECS. Otherwise, SCSI reservations may not work properly, which may put your data at risk.

                  Concepts of the anti-affinity ECS group and SCSI reservations:

                  • The anti-affinity policy of an ECS group allows ECSs to be created on different physical servers to improve service reliability.

                    For details about ECS groups, see Managing ECS Groups in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.

                    -
                  • The SCSI reservation mechanism uses a SCSI reservation command to perform SCSI reservation operations. If an ECS sends such a command to an EVS disk, the disk is displayed as locked to other ECSs, preventing the data damage that may be caused by simultaneous read/write operations to the disk from multiple ECSs.
                  • ECS groups and SCSI reservations have the following relationship: A SCSI reservation on a single EVS disk cannot differentiate multiple ECSs on the same physical host. For that reason, if multiple ECSs that use the same shared EVS disk are running on the same physical host, SCSI reservations will not work properly. Therefore, you are advised to use SCSI reservations only on ECSs that are in the same ECS group, thus having a working anti-affinity policy.
                  +
                • The SCSI reservation mechanism uses a SCSI reservation command to perform SCSI reservation operations. If an ECS sends such a command to an EVS disk, the disk is displayed as locked to other ECSs, preventing the data damage that may be caused by simultaneous read/write operations to the disk from multiple ECSs.
                • ECS groups and SCSI reservations have the following relationship: A SCSI reservation on a single EVS disk cannot differentiate multiple ECSs on the same physical host. For that reason, if multiple ECSs that use the same shared EVS disk are running on the same physical host, SCSI reservations will not work properly. So you are advised to use SCSI reservations only on ECSs that are in the same ECS group, thus having a working anti-affinity policy.

              Advantages

              • Multiple attachments: A shared EVS disk can be attached to a maximum of 16 servers.
              • High-performance: The random read/write IOPS of a shared ultra-high I/O disk can reach up to 160,000.
              • High-reliability: Shared EVS disks support both manual and automatic backup, delivering highly reliable data storage.
              • Wide range of use: Shared EVS disks can be used for Linux RHCS clusters where only VBD EVS disks are needed. They can also be used for Windows MSCS and Veritas VCS clusters that require SCSI reservations.
              -

              Specifications and Performance

              Shared EVS disks have the same specifications and performance as non-shared EVS disks. For details, see Disk Types and Performance.

              +

              Specifications and Performance

              Shared EVS disks have the same specifications and performance as non-shared EVS disks.

              Data Sharing Principle and Common Usage Mistakes

              A shared EVS disk is essentially the disk that can be attached to multiple servers for use, which is similar to a physical disk in that the disk can be attached to multiple physical servers, and each server can read data from and write data into any space on the disk. If the data read/write rules, such as the read/write sequence and meaning, between these servers are not defined, data read/write interference between servers or other unpredictable errors may occur.

              Though shared EVS disks are block storage devices that provide shared access for servers, shared EVS disks do not have the cluster management capability. Therefore, you need to deploy a cluster system to manage shared EVS disks. Common cluster management systems include Windows MSCS, Linux RHCS, Veritas VCS, and Veritas CFS.

              @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@

              Before you attach a shared EVS disk to multiple servers, the disk device type needs to be determined. The device type can be either VBD or SCSI. Shared SCSI EVS disks support SCSI reservations. Before using SCSI reservations, you need to install a driver in the server OS and ensure that the OS image is included in the compatibility list.

              For details about the usages of shared EVS disks, see Managing Shared EVS Disks.

              -

              If you simply attach a shared EVS disk to multiple servers, files cannot be shared between the servers as shared EVS disks do not have the cluster capability. Therefore, build a shared file system or deploy a cluster management system if you need to share files between servers.

              +

              If you simply attach a shared EVS disk to multiple servers, files cannot be shared between the servers as shared EVS disks do not have the cluster capability. Therefore, build a shared file system or deploy a cluster management system if you need to share files between servers.

              diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0052554220.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0052554220.html index 71b2b8dd..e1b5feb4 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0052554220.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0052554220.html @@ -8,35 +8,36 @@

              Common Application Scenarios and Usage Instructions of SCSI EVS Disks

              • BMSs support only SCSI EVS disks.
              • Shared SCSI EVS disks: Shared SCSI EVS disks must be used together with a distributed file system or cluster software. Because most cluster applications, such as Windows MSCS, Veritas VCS, and Veritas CFS, require SCSI reservations, you are advised to use shared EVS disks with SCSI.

                SCSI reservations take effect only when shared SCSI EVS disks are attached to ECSs in the same ECS group. For more information about shared EVS disks, see Shared EVS Disks and Usage Instructions.

              -

              Do I Need to Install a Driver for SCSI EVS Disks?

              To use SCSI EVS disks, you need to install a driver for certain server OSs.
              • Bare Metal Server (BMS)

                Both the Windows and Linux images for BMSs are pre-installed with the required SDI card driver. Therefore, no driver needs to be installed.

                +

                Do I Need to Install a Driver for SCSI EVS Disks?

                To use SCSI EVS disks, a cloud server must have a SCSI driver installed. If the SCSI driver is not pre-installed, you need to install it manually.

                +
                Check whether you need to manually install the driver based on the server type.
                • Bare Metal Server (BMS)

                  Both the Windows and Linux images for BMSs are pre-installed with the required SDI card driver. Therefore, no driver needs to be installed.

                • KVM ECS

                  You are advised to use SCSI EVS disks with KVM ECSs. Linux images and Windows images for KVM ECSs already have the required driver. Therefore, no driver needs to be installed for KVM ECSs.

                  ECS virtualization types are categorized into KVM and Xen. For details, see ECS Types.

                • Xen ECS

                  Due to driver limitations, you are advised not to use SCSI EVS disk with Xen ECSs.

                  However, a few images support SCSI EVS disks on Xen ECSs. For the supported images, see Table 1.

                  After confirming that the OS images of Xen ECSs support SCSI EVS disks, determine whether you need to install the driver:

                  • Public Windows images are preinstalled with the Paravirtual SCSI (PVSCSI) driver. Therefore, no driver needs to be installed.
                  • Private Windows images are not preinstalled with the PVSCSI driver. You need to download and install it explicitly.

                    For details, see (Optional) Optimizing Windows Private Images in the Image Management Service User Guide.

                    -
                  • Linux images are not preinstalled with the PVSCSI driver. You need to obtain the source code of the open-source Linux driver at https://github.com/UVP-Tools/SAP-HANA-Tools.

                    Note that this driver is different from the PVSCSI drivers attached to some Linux distributions.

                    +
                  • Linux images are not preinstalled with the PVSCSI driver. You need to obtain the source code of the open-source Linux driver at https://github.com/UVP-Tools/SAP-HANA-Tools, compile the code, and then install the driver.

                    Note that this driver is different from the PVSCSI drivers attached to some Linux distributions.

                  -
                  @@ -69,9 +72,12 @@
                  Table 1 OSs supporting SCSI EVS disks

                  Virtualization Type

                  +
                  - - - - - - diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0066615262.html b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0066615262.html index a5000a50..d6ed31ab 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0066615262.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/en-us_topic_0066615262.html @@ -2,10 +2,12 @@

                  Creating a Snapshot

                  Scenarios

                  You can create an EVS snapshot on the management console to save the EVS disk data at a specific time point.

                  +

                  Creating snapshots does not affect the performance of the disk.

                  +
                  -

                  Constraints

                  • A maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for one disk.
                  • Snapshots can be created for both system disks and data disks.
                  • Snapshots can be created only for available or in-use disks.
                  • Snapshots of encrypted disks are stored encrypted, and those of non-encrypted disks are stored non-encrypted.
                  • If a disk is created from a snapshot, the AZ of the disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk and cannot be changed.
                  +

                  Constraints

                  • A maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for one disk.
                  • Snapshots can be created for both system disks and data disks.
                  • Snapshots can be created only for available or in-use disks.
                  • Snapshots of encrypted disks are stored encrypted, and those of non-encrypted disks are stored non-encrypted.
                  -

                  Creating a Snapshot on the Disks Page

                  1. Log in to the management console.
                  2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                  3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                    The disk list page is displayed.

                    +

                    Creating a Snapshot on the Disks Page

                    1. Log in to the management console.
                    2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                    3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                      The disk list page is displayed.

                    4. In the disk list, locate the row that contains the target disk, click Create Snapshot in the Operation column.

                      Configure the basic settings for the snapshot according to Table 1.

                  Table 1 OSs supporting SCSI EVS disks

                  Virtualization Type

                  OS

                  +

                  OS

                  Xen

                  +

                  Xen

                  Windows

                  +

                  Windows

                  See the Windows images listed on the Public Images page.

                  +

                  See the Windows images listed on the Public Images page.

                  Log in to the management console, choose Image Management Service, click the Public Images tab, and select ECS image and Windows from the drop-down lists, respectively.

                  Linux

                  +

                  Linux

                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP4 64bit (The kernel version is 3.0.101-68-default or 3.0.101-80-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 64bit (The kernel version is 3.12.51-52.31-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1 64bit (The kernel version is 3.12.67-60.64.24-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP2 64bit (The kernel version is 4.4.74-92.35.1-default.)
                  +
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP4 64bit (The kernel version is 3.0.101-68-default or 3.0.101-80-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 64bit (The kernel version is 3.12.51-52.31-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1 64bit (The kernel version is 3.12.67-60.64.24-default.)
                  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP2 64bit (The kernel version is 4.4.74-92.35.1-default.)
                  Table 1 Snapshot parameter

                  Parameter

                  @@ -27,10 +29,11 @@
                  +
                  Figure 1 Create Snapshot

                • Click Create Now.
                • Go back to the Snapshots page to view the snapshot creation information.

                  After the snapshot status changes to Available, the snapshot has been created.

                • -

                  Creating a Snapshot on the Snapshots Page

                  1. Log in to the management console.
                  2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                  3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                    The disk list page is displayed.

                    +

                    Creating a Snapshot on the Snapshots Page

                    1. Log in to the management console.
                    2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                    3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                      The disk list page is displayed.

                    4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                      On the Snapshots page, click Create Snapshot.

                      Configure the basic settings for the snapshot according to Table 2.

                      @@ -45,7 +48,7 @@

                  Region

                  Mandatory

                  -

                  After you select a region, disks in the selected region will be displayed for you to choose.

                  +

                  After you select a region, disks in the selected region will be displayed for you to choose from.

                  -

                  -

                • Click Create Now.
                • Go back to the Snapshots page to view the snapshot creation information.

                  After the snapshot status changes to Available, the snapshot has been created.

                  +
                  Figure 2 Create Snapshot
                  +

                • Click Create Now.
                • Go back to the Snapshots page to view the snapshot creation information.

                  After the snapshot status changes to Available, the snapshot has been created.

                +

                Snapshot FAQ

                For more snapshot FAQs, see Snapshot.

                +

              Disk capacity > 2 TiB

              +

              If the server is stopped during the expansion, the additional space of a Windows system disk, Windows data disk, or Linux system disk may be automatically added to the last partition after the server is started. In this case, the additional space can be directly used. If the additional space is not automatically added, extend the partition and file system according to the preceding steps.

              +

            Related Operations

            For more expansion FAQs, see Capacity Expansion.

            diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0007.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0007.html index 9188125b..871f2f5d 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0007.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0007.html @@ -3,22 +3,26 @@

            Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk

            Scenarios

            This section describes how to expand the capacity of an In-use EVS disk on the management console. The In-use status indicates that the disk has been attached to a server. You do not need to detach the disk when expanding an In-use disk.

            -

            Constraints

            • Currently, disk capacities can only be expanded, but cannot be reduced.
            • When expanding an In-use disk, the server containing this disk must be in the Running or Stopped state.
            • A shared disk cannot be expanded in the In-use state. To expand a shared In-use disk, you must detach it from all its servers, wait until its status changes to Available, and then expand its capacity. For more information, see Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk.
            • Only some server OSs support capacity expansion of In-use disks. For details, see the official document of the corresponding OS.

              If the server OS does not support capacity expansion of In-use disks, detach the disk and then expand its capacity. Otherwise, you may need to stop and then start the server after the expansion to make the additional space available.

              +

              Constraints

              • Disk capacity can be expanded, but cannot be reduced.
              • When expanding an In-use disk, the server attached with this disk must be in the Running or Stopped state.
              • A shared disk in the In-use state cannot be expanded. To expand such a disk, you must detach it from all its servers, wait until its status changes to Available, and then expand its capacity. For more information, see Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk.
              • Only some server OSs support capacity expansion of In-use disks. For details, see the official document of the corresponding OS.

                For servers without such support, detach the disk and then expand its capacity. Otherwise, you may need to stop and then start the server after the expansion to make the additional space available.

              -

              Procedure

              1. Log in to the management console.
              2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
              3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                The disk list page is displayed.

                -

              4. Determine whether to view the server information before expanding the disk.

                • If you need to view the server information, perform the following procedure:
                  1. In the disk list, click the name of the to-be-expanded disk.

                    The disk details page is displayed.

                    +

                    Prerequisites

                    Disk data has been backed up using CBR or snapshots. For details about backups, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

                    +
                    +

                    Procedure

                    1. Log in to the management console.
                    2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                    3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                      The disk list page is displayed.

                      +

                    4. Choose a way to expand the disk by determining whether you want to check server information first.

                      • If yes, perform the following procedure:
                        1. In the disk list, click the name of the to-be-expanded disk.

                          The disk details page is displayed.

                        2. Click the Attachments tab to view the server where the target disk has been attached.
                        3. Click Expand Capacity in the upper right corner of the page.

                          The expansion page is displayed.

                        -
                      • If you do not need to view the server information, perform the following procedure:
                        1. In the disk list, locate the row that contains the target disk and click Expand Capacity in the Operation column.

                          The expansion page is displayed.

                          +
                        2. If no, perform the following procedure:
                          1. In the disk list, locate the row that contains the target disk and click Expand Capacity in the Operation column.

                            The expansion page is displayed.

                      -

                    5. Set the Add Capacity (GiB) parameter and click Next.
                    6. On the Details page, check the disk details.

                      • If you do not need to modify the specifications, click Submit.
                      • If you need to modify the specifications, click Previous.
                      -

                      After the specifications are submitted, go back to the disk list page.

                      +

                    7. Set the New Capacity parameter and click Next.
                    8. On the Details page, check the disk details.

                      • Click Submit to start the expansion.
                      • Click Previous to change the settings.
                      +

                      After the configuration is submitted, go back to the disk list page.

                    9. In the disk list, view the capacity of the target disk.

                      When the disk status changes from Expanding to In-use and the disk capacity increases, the expansion has succeeded.

                      -

                      If the expansion fails, technical support personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the technical support personnel contact you. If you require that the error be handled as soon as possible, contact our technical support personnel. The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Expansion failed.

                      +

                      When the status of a disk is Expanding, you are not allowed to modify the specifications of the ECS where the disk is attached.

                      -

                    10. After the disk has been expanded on the management console, only the disk storage capacity is enlarged, but its additional space cannot be used directly. You must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system.

                      The operation method varies depending on the server OS.

                      +

                      If the expansion fails, technical support personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the technical support personnel contact you. If you require that the error be handled as soon as possible, contact our technical support personnel. Disks whose capacities failed to be expanded are not billed.

                      +
                      +

                    11. Log in to the server and extend the partition and file system after the disk has been expanded on the console, because previous steps only enlarge the disk space.

                      The operations vary depending on the server OS.

                    diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0008.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0008.html index 530650a3..56f672ba 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0008.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0008.html @@ -3,16 +3,20 @@

                    Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk

                    Scenarios

                    This section describes how to expand the capacity of an Available EVS disk on the management console. The Available status indicates that the disk has not been attached to any server.

                    -

                    Constraints

                    • Currently, disk capacities can only be expanded, but cannot be reduced.
                    • A shared disk cannot be expanded in the In-use state. To expand a shared In-use disk, you must detach it from all its servers, wait until its status changes to Available, and then expand its capacity.
                    +

                    Constraints

                    • Disk capacity can be expanded, but cannot be reduced.
                    • A shared disk in the In-use state cannot be expanded. To expand such a disk, you must detach it from all its servers, wait until its status changes to Available, and then expand its capacity.
                    -

                    Procedure

                    1. Log in to the management console.
                    2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                    3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                      The disk list page is displayed.

                      -

                    4. In the disk list, locate the row that contains the target disk and click Expand Capacity in the Operation column.

                      The expansion page is displayed.

                      -

                    5. Set the Add Capacity (GiB) parameter and click Next.
                    6. On the Details page, check the disk details.

                      • If you do not need to modify the specifications, click Submit.
                      • If you need to modify the specifications, click Previous.
                      -

                      After the specifications are submitted, go back to the disk list page.

                      +

                      Prerequisites

                      Disk data has been backed up using CBR or snapshots. For details about backups, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

                      +
                      +

                      Procedure

                      1. Log in to the management console.
                      2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                      3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                        The disk list page is displayed.

                        +

                      4. In the disk list, locate the row that contains the target disk and click Expand Capacity in the Operation column.

                        The expansion page is displayed.

                        +

                      5. Set the New Capacity parameter and click Next.
                      6. On the Details page, check the disk details.

                        • Click Submit to start the expansion.
                        • Click Previous to change the settings.
                        +

                        After the configuration is submitted, go back to the disk list page.

                      7. In the disk list, view the capacity of the target disk.

                        When the disk status changes from Expanding to Available and the disk capacity increases, the expansion has succeeded.

                        -

                        If the expansion fails, technical support personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the technical support personnel contact you. If you require that the error be handled as soon as possible, contact our technical support personnel. The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Expansion failed.

                        +

                        When the status of a disk is Expanding, you are not allowed to modify the specifications of the ECS where the disk is attached.

                        -

                      8. Attach the disk to the server. For details, see Attach an EVS Disk.
                      9. After the disk has been expanded on the management console, only the disk storage capacity is enlarged, but its additional space cannot be used directly. You must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system.

                        The operation method varies depending on the server OS.

                        +

                        If the expansion fails, technical support personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the technical support personnel contact you. If you require that the error be handled as soon as possible, contact our technical support personnel. Disks whose capacities failed to be expanded are not billed.

                        +
                        +

                      10. Attach the disk to the server. For details, see Attach an EVS Disk.
                      11. Log in to the server and extend the partition and file system after the disk has been expanded on the console, because previous steps only enlarge the disk space.

                        The operations vary depending on the server OS.

                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0009.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0009.html index 3586cbe3..af0dd263 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0009.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0009.html @@ -1,18 +1,150 @@

                      Managing Encrypted EVS Disks

                      -

                      Relationships Between Encrypted Disks, Backups and Snapshots

                      The encryption function can be used to encrypt system disks, data disks, backups and snapshots. The details are as follows:
                      • System disk encryption relies on the image that is used to create the server.
                        • If an encrypted image is used to create the server, the system disk will be encrypted by default, and the system disk and image share the same encryption method. For details, see Managing Private Images > Encrypting Images in the Image Management Service User Guide.
                        • If a non-encrypted image is used to create the server, you can determine whether to encrypt the system disk during the server creation. For details, see Getting Started > Creating an ECS > Step 1: Configure Basic Settings in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                        -
                      • If an empty disk is created, you can determine whether to encrypt the disk or not. The encryption attribute of the disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.
                      • If a disk is created from a snapshot, the encryption attribute of the disk will be the same as that of the snapshot's source disk.
                      • If a disk is created from a backup, the encryption attribute of the disk does not need to be the same as that of the backup.
                      • If a snapshot is created for a disk, the encryption attribute of the snapshot is the same as that of the disk.
                      +

                      Encryption Scenarios

                      • System disk encryption

                        System disks are created along with servers and cannot be created separately. So whether a system disk is encrypted or not depends on the image selected during the server creation. See the following table for details.

                        + +
                        + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                        Table 1 Encryption relationship between images and system disks

                        Creating Server Using Encrypted Image

                        +

                        Whether System Disk Will Be Encrypted

                        +

                        Description

                        +

                        Yes

                        +

                        Yes

                        +

                        For details, see Managing Private Images > Encrypting Images in the Image Management Service User Guide.

                        +

                        No

                        +

                        No

                        +

                        -

                        +
                        +
                        +
                      • Data disk encryption

                        Data disks can be created along with servers or separately. Whether data disks are encrypted depends on their data sources. See the following table for details.

                        + +
                        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                        Table 2 Encryption relationship between backups, snapshots, images, and data disks

                        Created On

                        +

                        Method of Creation

                        +

                        Whether Data Disk Will Be Encrypted

                        +

                        Description

                        +

                        The ECS console

                        +

                        Created together with the server

                        +

                        Yes/No

                        +

                        When a data disk is created together with a server, you can choose to encrypt the disk or not. For details, see Getting Started > Creating an ECS > Step 1: Configure Basic Settings in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.

                        +

                        The EVS console

                        +

                        No data source selected

                        +

                        Yes/No

                        +

                        When an empty disk is created, you can choose whether to encrypt the disk or not. The encryption attribute of the disk cannot be changed after the disk has been created.

                        +

                        Creating from a backup

                        +

                        Yes/No

                        +
                        • When a disk is created from a backup, you can choose whether to encrypt the disk or not. The encryption attributes of the disk and backup do not need to be the same.
                        • When you create a backup for a system or data disk, the encryption attribute of the backup will be the same as that of the disk.
                        +

                        Creating from a snapshot

                        +

                        (The snapshot's source disk is encrypted.)

                        +

                        Yes

                        +

                        A snapshot created from an encrypted disk is also encrypted.

                        +

                        Creating from a snapshot

                        +

                        (The snapshot's source disk is not encrypted.)

                        +

                        No

                        +

                        A snapshot created from a non-encrypted disk is not encrypted.

                        +

                        Creating from an image

                        +

                        (The image's source disk is encrypted.)

                        +

                        Yes

                        +

                        -

                        +

                        Creating from an image

                        +

                        (The image's source disk is not encrypted.)

                        +

                        No

                        +

                        -

                        +
                        +
                        +

                        +
                      +
                      +

                      Constraints

                      +
                      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                      Table 3 Constraints on disk encryption

                      Item

                      +

                      Description

                      +

                      Types of disks supporting encryption

                      +

                      All disk types

                      +

                      Constraints on encrypted disks

                      +

                      The encryption attribute of a disk cannot be changed after the disk is created, meaning that:

                      +
                      • An encrypted disk cannot be changed to a non-encrypted disk.
                      • A non-encrypted disk cannot be changed to an encrypted disk.
                      +

                      Constraints on user permissions

                      +

                      When a user uses the encryption function, the condition varies depending on whether the user is the first one ever in the current region or project to use this function.

                      +
                      • If the user is the first user, the user needs to follow the prompt to create an agency, which grants KMS Administrator permissions to EVS. Then the user can create and obtain keys to encrypt and decrypt disks.
                        NOTE:

                        The first user must have the KMS Administrator permissions to create the agency. If the user does not have the KMS Administrator permissions, contact the account administrator to grant the permissions first.

                        +
                        +
                      • If the user is not the first user, the user can use encryption directly.
                      +

                      Constraints on encrypted images

                      +
                      • Encrypted images cannot be replicated across regions.
                      • Encrypted images cannot be changed to non-encrypted images.
                      • Encrypted images cannot be exported.
                      +
                      -

                      Creating an Encrypted EVS Disk

                      Before you use the encryption function, KMS access rights need to be granted to EVS. If you have the Security Administrator rights, grant the KMS access rights to EVS directly. If you do not have this permission, contact a user with the security administrator rights to grant KMS access rights to EVS, then repeat the preceding operations.

                      +

                      Creating an Encrypted EVS Disk

                      Before you use the encryption function, KMS access rights need to be granted to EVS. If you have the Security Administrator permissions, grant the KMS access rights to EVS directly. If you do not have this permission, contact a user with the security administrator permissions to grant KMS access rights to EVS and then select the encryption option to create an encrypted disk.

                      For details about how to create an encrypted disk, see Create an EVS Disk.

                      -

                      Detaching an Encrypted EVS Disk

                      Before you detach an EVS disk encrypted by a CMK, check whether the CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion. If the CMK is unavailable, the disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee how long it will be usable. If the disk is detached, it will not be possible to re-attach it later. In this case, do not detach the disk without a working CMK.

                      +

                      Detaching an Encrypted EVS Disk

                      Before you detach a disk encrypted by a CMK, check whether the CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.

                      +
                      • If the CMK is available, the disk can be detached and re-attached, and data on the disk will not be lost.
                      • If the CMK is unavailable, the disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee for how long it will be usable. If the disk is detached, it will be impossible to re-attach it later. In this case, do not detach the disk without a working CMK.

                      The restoration method varies depending on the CMK status. For details, see EVS Encryption.

                      -

                      If the CMK is available, the disk can be detached and re-attached, and data on the disk will not be lost.

                      For details about how to detach an encrypted disk, see Detaching a Data Disk.

                      -
                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0010.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0010.html index 52a19974..d80c84f4 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0010.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0010.html @@ -1,23 +1,26 @@

                      Managing Shared EVS Disks

                      -

                      How to Use Shared VBD and SCSI Disks?

                      You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach the shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.
                      • Shared VBD EVS disks: The device type of a newly created shared EVS disk is VBD by default. Such disks can be used as virtual block storage devices, but do not support SCSI reservations. If SCSI reservations are required for your applications, create shared SCSI EVS disks.
                      • Shared SCSI EVS disks: These EVS disks support SCSI reservations.
                        • To improve data security, you are advised to use SCSI reservations together with the anti-affinity policy of an ECS group. That said, ensure that shared SCSI EVS disks are only attached to ECSs in the same anti-affinity ECS group.
                        • If an ECS does not belong to any anti-affinity ECS group, you are advised not to attach shared SCSI EVS disks to this ECS. Otherwise, SCSI reservations may not work properly, which may put your data at risk.
                        +

                        How to Use Shared VBD and SCSI Disks

                        You can create shared VBD disks or shared SCSI disks. It is recommended that you attach a shared disk to the ECSs in the same ECS group to improve service reliability.
                        • Shared VBD disks: The device type of a newly created shared disk is VBD by default. Such disks can be used as virtual block storage devices, but do not support SCSI reservations. If SCSI reservations are required for your applications, create shared SCSI EVS disks.
                        • Shared SCSI disks: Such disks support SCSI reservations.
                          • To improve data security, you are advised to use SCSI reservations together with the anti-affinity policy of an ECS group. That said, ensure that shared SCSI disks are only attached to ECSs in the same anti-affinity ECS group.
                          • If an ECS does not belong to any anti-affinity ECS group, you are advised not to attach shared SCSI disks to this ECS. Otherwise, SCSI reservations may not work properly, which may put your data at risk.

                          Concepts of the anti-affinity ECS group and SCSI reservations:

                          • The anti-affinity policy of an ECS group allows ECSs to be created on different physical servers to improve service reliability.

                            For details about ECS groups, see Managing ECS Groups in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.

                            -
                          • The SCSI reservation mechanism uses a SCSI reservation command to perform SCSI reservation operations. If an ECS sends such a command to an EVS disk, the disk is displayed as locked to other ECSs, preventing the data damage that may be caused by simultaneous read/write operations to the disk from multiple ECSs.
                          • ECS groups and SCSI reservations have the following relationship: A SCSI reservation on a single EVS disk cannot differentiate multiple ECSs on the same physical host. For that reason, if multiple ECSs that use the same shared EVS disk are running on the same physical host, SCSI reservations will not work properly. Therefore, you are advised to use SCSI reservations only on ECSs that are in the same ECS group, thus having a working anti-affinity policy.
                          +
                        • The SCSI reservation mechanism uses a SCSI reservation command to perform SCSI reservation operations. If an ECS sends such a command to an EVS disk, the disk is displayed as locked to other ECSs, preventing the data damage that may be caused by simultaneous read/write operations to the disk from multiple ECSs.
                        • ECS groups and SCSI reservations have the following relationship: A SCSI reservation on a single EVS disk cannot differentiate multiple ECSs on the same physical host. For that reason, if multiple ECSs that use the same shared EVS disk are running on the same physical host, SCSI reservations will not work properly. So you are advised to use SCSI reservations only on ECSs that are in the same ECS group, thus having a working anti-affinity policy.
                      -

                      Attaching a Shared EVS Disk

                      A common EVS disk can only be attached to one server, whereas a shared EVS disk can be attached to up to 16 servers.

                      -

                      For details about how to attach a shared EVS disk, see Attaching a Shared Disk.

                      +

                      Constraints on Shared Disks

                      • A shared disk can be attached to a maximum of 16 servers.
                      • The sharing attribute of a disk cannot be changed after the disk is created.
                      • Shared disks can only be used as data disks. The sharing function is not supported for system disks.
                      • A shared file system or cluster management system must be set up before you can properly use a shared disk. If you simply attach a shared disk to multiple servers, the sharing function will not work and data may be overwritten.
                      • When a shared disk is attached to multiple servers, the total performance of the disk on all servers cannot exceed the maximum allowed on a single disk.
                      +
                      +

                      Attaching a Shared EVS Disk

                      A non-shared EVS disk can only be attached to one server, whereas a shared EVS disk can be attached to up to 16 servers.

                      +

                      For details, see Attaching a Shared Disk.

                      Deleting a Shared EVS Disk

                      Because a shared EVS disk can be attached to multiple servers, ensure that the shared EVS disk is detached from all the servers before deletion.

                      -

                      For details about how to delete a shared EVS disk, see Deleting EVS Disks.

                      +

                      For details, see Deleting EVS Disks.

                      Expanding a Shared EVS Disk

                      Shared EVS disks must be expanded when they are in the Available state. For details, see Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk.

                      Related Operations

                      For more disk sharing FAQs, see Sharing.

                      +
                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0011.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0011.html index 85d30c14..c47c68ef 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0011.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0011.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@

                      Deleting a Snapshot

                      -

                      Scenarios

                      If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete the snapshot to release the virtual resources. Snapshot deletion has the following constraints:

                      +

                      Scenarios

                      If a snapshot is no longer needed, you can delete it to release the virtual resources.

                      -

                      Constraints

                      • The snapshot status must be Available or Error.
                      • If a disk is deleted, all the snapshots created for this disk will also be deleted.
                      • If a snapshot is deleted, disks rolled back and created from this snapshot are not affected.
                      • If you have reinstalled or changed the server OS, snapshots of the system disk are automatically deleted. Snapshots of the data disks can be used as usual.
                      +

                      Constraints

                      • The snapshot status must be Available or Error.
                      • If a disk is deleted, all the snapshots created for this disk will also be deleted.
                      • If a snapshot is deleted, disks rolled back and created from this snapshot are not affected.
                      • If you have reinstalled or changed the server OS, snapshots of the system disk are automatically deleted. Snapshots of the data disks can be used as usual.
                      • A snapshot whose name starts with autobk_snapshot_vbs_, manualbk_snapshot_vbs_, autobk_snapshot_csbs_, or manualbk_snapshot_csbs_ is automatically generated during backup. You can only view details of such snapshots and cannot delete them.
                      -

                      Procedure

                      1. Log in to the management console.
                      2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                      3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                      4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                        The snapshot list page is displayed.

                        -

                      5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Delete in the Operation column.
                      6. (Optional) If multiple snapshots are to be deleted, select in front of each snapshot and click Delete in the upper area of the list.
                      7. In the displayed dialog box, confirm the information and click Yes.

                        If the snapshot is no longer displayed in the snapshot list, the snapshot is deleted successfully.

                        +

                        Procedure

                        1. Log in to the management console.
                        2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                        3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                        4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                          The snapshot list page is displayed.

                          +

                        5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Delete in the Operation column.
                        6. (Optional) If multiple snapshots are to be deleted, select in front of each snapshot and click Delete in the upper area of the list.
                        7. In the displayed dialog box, confirm the information and click Yes.

                          If the snapshot disappears from the snapshot list, the snapshot is deleted successfully.

                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0012.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0012.html index b05dfe73..107dfbc6 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0012.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0012.html @@ -1,12 +1,13 @@

                      Rolling Back Data from a Snapshot

                      -

                      Scenarios

                      If the data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back the data from a snapshot to the source disk to restore data. Snapshot rollback has the following constraints:

                      +

                      Scenarios

                      If data on an EVS disk is incorrect or damaged, you can roll back data from a snapshot to the source disk.

                      -

                      Constraints

                      • A snapshot can be rolled back only to its source disk. Rollback to another disk is not possible.
                      • A snapshot can be rolled back only when the snapshot status is Available and the source disk status is Available (not attached to any server) or Rollback failed.
                      +

                      Constraints

                      • Data of a snapshot can be rolled back only to its source disk. Rollback to another disk is not possible.
                      • Data of a snapshot can be rolled back only when the snapshot status is Available and its source disk status is Available (not attached to any server) or Rollback failed. If the source disk is attached, detach the disk first.
                      • A snapshot whose name starts with autobk_snapshot_vbs_, manualbk_snapshot_vbs_, autobk_snapshot_csbs_, or manualbk_snapshot_csbs_ is automatically generated during backup. Such a snapshot can only be viewed. It cannot be used to roll back the disk data.
                      • Spot instances do not support snapshot-based rollback of the disk data.
                      -

                      Procedure

                      1. Log in to the management console.
                      2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                      3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                      4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                        The snapshot list page is displayed.

                        -

                      5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Roll Back Disk in the Operation column.
                      6. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.
                      7. The snapshot list is displayed. After the snapshot status changes from Rolling back to Available, the data rollback is successful.
                      +

                      Procedure

                      1. Log in to the management console.
                      2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                      3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                      4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                        The snapshot list page is displayed.

                        +

                      5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Roll Back Disk in the Operation column.
                      6. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.

                        The snapshot list is displayed. After the snapshot status changes from Rolling back to Available, the data rollback is successful.

                        +

                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0013.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0013.html index d44f1941..8f66a2da 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0013.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0013.html @@ -3,13 +3,13 @@

                      Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot

                      Scenarios

                      This section describes how to create an EVS disk on the Snapshots page. Besides, you can also create an EVS disk from a snapshot by specifying the Create from snapshot parameter on the disk creation page. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.

                      -

                      Constraints

                      • The disk type, device type, encryption, and snapshot attributes of the new disk are the same as those of the snapshot's source disk.
                      • A maximum of 128 disks can be created from a snapshot.
                      • Batch disk creation is not possible, and the quantity parameter must be set to 1.
                      • If a disk is created from a snapshot, the AZ of the disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk and cannot be changed.
                      +

                      Constraints

                      • The disk type, device type, encryption, and snapshot attributes of the new disk are the same as those of the snapshot's source disk.
                      • Batch disk creation is not possible, and the quantity parameter must be set to 1.
                      • The AZ of the disk is the same as that of the snapshot's source disk and cannot be changed.
                      • A snapshot whose name starts with autobk_snapshot_vbs_, manualbk_snapshot_vbs_, autobk_snapshot_csbs_, or manualbk_snapshot_csbs_ is automatically generated during backup. Such a snapshot can only be viewed. It cannot be used to create new disks.
                      -

                      Procedure

                      1. Log in to the management console.
                      2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                      3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                      4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                        The snapshot list page is displayed.

                        -

                      5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Create Disk in the Operation column.
                      6. Set the EVS disk parameters. For details, see parameter descriptions and operations provided in Create an EVS Disk.

                        A maximum of 128 disks can be created from a snapshot.

                        -

                        If you create a disk from a snapshot, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the snapshot size. In the condition that you do not specify the disk capacity, if the snapshot size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default capacity 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the snapshot size is greater than 10 GiB, the disk capacity will be consistent with the snapshot size.

                        +

                        Procedure

                        1. Log in to the management console.
                        2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                        3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.
                        4. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Elastic Volume Service > Snapshots.

                          The snapshot list page is displayed.

                          +

                        5. In the snapshot list, locate the row that contains the target snapshot and click Create Disk in the Operation column.
                        6. Configure the disk parameters. For details, see parameter descriptions and operations provided in Create an EVS Disk.

                          A maximum of 128 disks can be created from a snapshot.

                          +

                          If you create a disk from a snapshot, the disk capacity must be greater than or equal to the snapshot size. In the condition that you do not specify the disk capacity, if the snapshot size is smaller than 10 GiB, the default capacity 10 GiB will be used as the disk capacity; if the snapshot size is greater than 10 GiB, the snapshot size will be used as the disk capacity.

                          -

                        7. Click Create Now.
                        8. Go back to the disk list page and view the disk status.

                          When the disk status changes to Available, the disk is successfully created.

                          +

                        9. Click Create Now.
                        10. In the disk list, view the disk status.

                          When the disk status changes to Available, the disk is successfully created.

                        diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0014.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0014.html index 0238cc2b..ef0774d4 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0014.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0014.html @@ -1,14 +1,13 @@

                        Adding a Tag

                        -

                        Scenarios

                        This section is used to guide users to add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.

                        -

                        Tags are used to identify the cloud resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.

                        +

                        Scenarios

                        You can add a tag for an existing EVS disk. You can also add tags during the disk creation. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.

                        • A tag is composed of a key-value pair.
                          • Key:
                            • Must be unique for each resource.
                            • Can contain a maximum of 36 characters.
                            • Can contain only digits, letters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
                          • Value:
                            • Can contain a maximum of 43 characters.
                            • Can contain only digits, letters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
                        • A maximum of 10 tags can be added for an EVS disk.
                        -

                        Procedure

                        1. Log in to the management console.
                        2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                        3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                          The disk list page is displayed.

                          +

                          Procedure

                          1. Log in to the management console.
                          2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                          3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                            The disk list page is displayed.

                          4. In the disk list, locate the desired disk and click the disk name.

                            The disk details page is displayed.

                          5. Click the Tags tab.
                          6. Click Add Tag.

                            The Add Tag page is displayed.

                          7. Enter a key and a value for a tag and click OK.

                            • Key: This parameter is mandatory.
                            • Value: This parameter is optional.
                            @@ -18,7 +17,7 @@
                          diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0015.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0015.html index 66d060cf..a11ccb35 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0015.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0015.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

                          Modifying a Tag

                          Scenarios

                          You can change the value of a tag for an existing disk, but cannot change the key of a tag.

                          -

                          Procedure

                          1. Log in to the management console.
                          2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                          3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                            The disk list page is displayed.

                            +

                            Procedure

                            1. Log in to the management console.
                            2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                            3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                              The disk list page is displayed.

                            4. In the disk list, locate the desired disk and click the disk name.

                              The disk details page is displayed.

                            5. Click the Tags tab.
                            6. Locate the target tag and click Edit in the Operation column.

                              The Edit Tag page is displayed.

                            7. Change the value of the tag and click OK.

                              Return to the tag list. If the tag value is changed, the modification is complete.

                              @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
                            diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0016.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0016.html index 589fa691..204b169f 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0016.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0016.html @@ -3,16 +3,16 @@

                            Deleting a Tag

                            Scenarios

                            If an existing tag is no longer needed, you can delete it.

                            -

                            Procedure

                            1. Log in to the management console.
                            2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                            3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                              The disk list page is displayed.

                              +

                              Procedure

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                              3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                                The disk list page is displayed.

                              4. In the disk list, locate the desired disk and click the disk name.

                                The disk details page is displayed.

                              5. Click the Tags tab.
                              6. Locate the target tag and click Delete in the Operation column.

                                The Delete Tag page is displayed.

                                -

                              7. Confirm the information and click Yes.

                                Return to the tag list. If the tag is no longer displayed in the tag list, the deletion is successful.

                                +

                              8. Confirm the information and click Yes.

                                The tag is deleted if it disappears from the tag list.

                            diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0018.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0018.html index e6f5dd56..71802442 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0018.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0018.html @@ -1,21 +1,21 @@

                            Extending Partitions and File Systems for SCSI Disks (Linux)

                            -

                            Scenarios

                            After a disk has been expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.

                            +

                            Scenarios

                            After a disk is expanded on the management console, the disk size is enlarged, but the additional space cannot be used directly.

                            In Linux, you must allocate the additional space to an existing partition or a new partition.

                            This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit as the sample OS to describe how to extend an MBR partition of a SCSI data disk. The method for allocating the additional space varies with the server OS. This section is used for reference only. For detailed operations and differences, see the corresponding OS documents.
                            -

                            Performing the expansion operations with caution. Misoperation may lead to data loss or exceptions. Therefore, you are advised to back up the disk data using CBR or snapshots before expansion. For details about using CBR, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about using snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

                            +

                            Performing the expansion operations with caution. Incorrect operations may lead to data loss or exceptions. So you are advised to back up the disk data using CBR or snapshots before expansion. For details about using CBR, see Managing EVS Backups. For details about using snapshots, see Creating a Snapshot.

                            -

                            Prerequisites

                            • You have expanded the disk capacity and attached the disk to a server on the management console. For details, see Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk or Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk.
                            • You have logged in to the server.
                              • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                              • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
                              +

                              Prerequisites

                              Creating a New MBR Partition

                              Originally, data disk /dev/sda has 50 GiB and one partition (/dev/sda1), and then 50 GiB is added to the disk. The following procedure shows you how to create a new MBR partition /dev/sda2 with this 50 GiB.

                              1. Run the following command to view the disk partition information:

                                fdisk -l

                                Information similar to the following is displayed:
                                [root@ecs-scsi ~]# fdisk -l
                                 
                                -Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                                +Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GiB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                                 Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                                 Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                 I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Disk identifier: 0x000bcb4e
                                    Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
                                 /dev/vda1   *        2048    83886079    41942016   83  Linux
                                 
                                -Disk /dev/sda: 107.4 GB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                                +Disk /dev/sda: 107.4 GiB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                                 Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                                 Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                 I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Partition type:
                                 Select (default p):
                                There are two types of disk partitions:
                                • Choosing p creates a primary partition.
                                • Choosing e creates an extended partition.
                                -

                                If the MBR partition style is used, a maximum of 4 primary partitions, or 3 primary partitions and 1 extended partition can be created. The extended partition cannot be used directly and must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                                +

                                If MBR is used, a maximum of four primary partitions, or three primary partitions plus one extended partition can be created. The extended partition must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                                Disk partitions created using GPT are not categorized.

                                @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Command (m for help):

                              2. Enter p and press Enter to view the new partition.

                                Information similar to the following is displayed:
                                Command (m for help): p
                                 
                                -Disk /dev/sda: 107.4 GB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                                +Disk /dev/sda: 107.4 GiB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                                 Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                                 Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                 I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ tmpfs          tmpfs     520M     0  520M   0% /sys/fs/cgroup
                                 tmpfs          tmpfs     104M     0  104M   0% /run/user/0
                                 /dev/sda1      ext4       53G   55M   50G   1% /mnt/sdc
                                 /dev/sda2      ext4       53G   55M   50G   1% /mnt/test
                                -

                                If the server is restarted, the mounting will become invalid. You can set automatic mounting for partitions at system start by modifying the /etc/fstab file. For details, see Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                                +

                                If the server is restarted, the mounting will become invalid. You can modify the /etc/fstab file to configure automount at startup. For details, see Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                              @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ tmpfs tmpfs 104M 0 104M 0% /run/user/0
                              1. Run the following command to view the disk partition information:

                                fdisk -l

                                Information similar to the following is displayed:
                                [root@ecs-scsi ~]# fdisk -l
                                 
                                -Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                                +Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GiB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                                 Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                                 Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                 I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Disk identifier: 0x000bcb4e
                                    Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
                                 /dev/vda1   *        2048    83886079    41942016   83  Linux
                                 
                                -Disk /dev/sda: 161.1 GB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                                +Disk /dev/sda: 161.1 GiB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                                 Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                                 Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                 I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                                @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Partition 2 is deleted
                                 
                                 Command (m for help): 
                                -

                                After deleting the partition, recreate the partition according to the following steps, and data on this disk will not be lost.

                                +

                                After deleting the partition, re-create the partition according to the following steps, and data on this disk will not be lost.

                            • Enter n and press Enter to create a new partition.

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:
                              Command (m for help): n
                              @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Partition type:
                               Select (default p): 
                              There are two types of disk partitions:
                              • Choosing p creates a primary partition.
                              • Choosing e creates an extended partition.
                              -

                              If the MBR partition style is used, a maximum of 4 primary partitions, or 3 primary partitions and 1 extended partition can be created. The extended partition cannot be used directly and must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                              +

                              If MBR is used, a maximum of four primary partitions, or three primary partitions plus one extended partition can be created. The extended partition must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                              Disk partitions created using GPT are not categorized.

                              @@ -280,17 +280,17 @@ Using default value 104857600 Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (104857600-314572799, default 314572799):

                              In the command output, Last sector specifies the end sector.

                              -

                            • Ensure that the entered end sector is larger than or equal to the end sector recorded in 1 or 2. In this example, the recorded end sector is 209715199, and the default end sector is used. Therefore, enter 314572799 and press Enter.

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:
                              Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (104857600-314572799, default 314572799):
                              +

                            • Ensure that the entered end sector is greater than or equal to the end sector recorded in 1 or 2. In this example, the recorded end sector is 209715199, and the default end sector is used. Therefore, enter 314572799 and press Enter.

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:
                              Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (104857600-314572799, default 314572799):
                               Using default value 314572799
                               Partition 2 of type Linux and of size 100 GiB is set
                               
                               Command (m for help):

                              The partition is created.

                              -

                            • Enter p and press Enter to view the partition details.

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:

                              +

                            • Enter p and press Enter to print the partition details.

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:

                              Command (m for help): p
                               
                              -Disk /dev/sda: 161.1 GB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                              +Disk /dev/sda: 161.1 GiB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                               Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                               Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                               I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                              @@ -383,33 +383,31 @@ tmpfs          tmpfs     520M     0  520M   0% /sys/fs/cgroup
                               tmpfs          tmpfs     104M     0  104M   0% /run/user/0
                               /dev/sda1      ext4       53G   55M   50G   1% /mnt/sdc
                               /dev/sda2      ext4      106G   63M  101G   1% /mnt/test
                              -

                              If the server is restarted, the mounting will become invalid. You can set automatic mounting for partitions at system start by modifying the /etc/fstab file. For details, see Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                              -

                          -

                          Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start

                          Modify the fstab file to set automatic disk mounting at server start. You can also set automatic mounting for the servers containing data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                          -

                          The following procedure shows how to set automatic disk mounting at server start by using UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names to identify disks in the file because a device name may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) during the server stop or start, resulting in improper server running after restart.

                          -

                          UUID is the unique character string for disk partitions in a Linux system.

                          +

                          Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start

                          The fstab file controls what disks are automatically mounted at server startup. You can configure the fstab file of a server that has data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                          +

                          The following example uses UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names (like /dev/vdb1) to identify disks in the file because device names are assigned dynamically and may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) after a server stop or start. This can even prevent your server from booting up.

                          +

                          UUIDs are the unique character strings for identifying partitions in Linux.

                          -
                          1. Run the following command to query the partition UUID:

                            blkid Disk partition

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to query the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition:

                            -

                            blkid /dev/vdb1

                            -

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:

                            -
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                            +
                            1. Query the partition UUID.

                              blkid Disk partition

                              +

                              In this example, the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is queried.

                              +

                              blkid /dev/vdb1

                              +

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:

                              +
                              [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                               /dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"
                              -

                              The UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is displayed.

                              -

                            2. Run the following command to open the fstab file using the vi editor:

                              vi /etc/fstab

                              -

                            3. Press i to enter editing mode.
                            4. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                              UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                              -

                            5. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                              The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                              -

                            6. Perform the following operations to verify the automatic mounting function:

                              1. Run the following command to unmount the partition:

                                umount Disk partition

                                -

                                In this example, run the following command:

                                -

                                umount /dev/vdb1

                                -
                              2. Run the following command to reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file:

                                mount -a

                                -
                              3. Run the following command to query the file system mounting information:

                                mount | grep Mount point

                                -

                                In this example, run the following command:

                                -

                                mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                                -

                                If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                                -
                                root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                                +

                                Carefully record the UUID, as you will need it for the following step.

                                +

                              4. Open the fstab file using the vi editor.

                                vi /etc/fstab

                                +

                              5. Press i to enter editing mode.
                              6. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                                UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                                +

                              7. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                                The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                                +

                              8. Verify that the disk is auto-mounted at startup.

                                1. Unmount the partition.

                                  umount Disk partition

                                  +

                                  In this example, run the following command:

                                  +

                                  umount /dev/vdb1

                                  +
                                2. Reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file.

                                  mount -a

                                  +
                                3. Query the file system mounting information.

                                  mount | grep Mount point

                                  +

                                  In this example, run the following command:

                                  +

                                  mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                                  +

                                  If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                                  +
                                  root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                                   /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc type ext4 (rw,relatime,data=ordered)

                              diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0019.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0019.html index fb9a6118..6c23fd50 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0019.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0019.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -

                              Searching Disks by Tags

                              +

                              Searching for Disks by Tag

                              Scenarios

                              Tags can be used to categorize EVS disks, and users can quickly search for their desired EVS disks by tags. This section is used to guide users to search for EVS disk by existing tags.

                              -

                              Procedure

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                              3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                                The disk list page is displayed.

                                +

                                Procedure

                                1. Log in to the management console.
                                2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                                3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                                  The disk list page is displayed.

                                4. In the upper area of the disk list, click Search by Tag.

                                  The Search by Tag page is displayed.

                                  -

                                5. Enter or select an existing tag in the text box under Search by Tag.
                                6. (Optional) If disks containing multiple tags need to be queried, click to add tags.

                                  A maximum of 10 tags can be added at a time.

                                  +

                                7. Enter or select an existing tag in the text box under Search by Tag.
                                8. (Optional) If disks containing multiple tags need to be queried, click to add tags.

                                  You can add a maximum of 10 tags to search for disks. If you add more than one tag, only the disks containing all specified tags will be returned.

                                  For the added tags, you can delete them individually or click Reset to clear all of them.

                                9. After the tags are added, click Search.

                                  Disks owning the added tags are displayed in the list, and the search is complete.

                                @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
                                diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0021.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0021.html index e10185a2..09c5ab9f 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0021.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0021.html @@ -4,9 +4,25 @@

                                What Is EVS Backup?

                                Cloud Disk Backup provided by Cloud Backup and Recovery (CBR) allows you to create backups for your EVS disks while servers are running. If data loss or damage occurred due to virus invasions, accidental deletions, or software/hardware faults, you can use backups to restore data, guaranteeing your data integrity and security.

                                For more information, see the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

                                +

                                CBR Architecture

                                CBR involves backups, vaults, and policies.

                                +

                                Backup

                                +

                                A backup is a copy of a particular chunk of data and is usually stored elsewhere so that it may be used to restore the original data in the event of data loss. There are the following types of backups:

                                +
                                • Cloud disk backup: provides snapshot-based backups for EVS disks.
                                • Cloud server backup: uses the consistency snapshot technology to protect data for ECSs.
                                • SFS Turbo backup: backs up data of SFS Turbo file systems.
                                +

                                Vault

                                +

                                CBR stores backups in vaults. Before creating a backup, you need to create at least one vault and associate the resources you want to back up with the vaults. Then the resources can be backed up to the associated vaults.

                                +

                                +

                                Vaults can be either backup vaults or replication vaults. Backup vaults store resource backups, and replication vaults store backup replicas.

                                +

                                Different types of resources must be backed up to different types of vaults. For example, cloud servers must be backed up to server backup vaults, not disk backup vaults or any other types of vaults.

                                +

                                Policy

                                +

                                There are backup policies and replication policies.

                                +
                                • A backup policy defines when you want to take a backup and for how long you would retain each backup.
                                • A replication policy defines when you want to replicate from backup vaults and for how long you would retain each replica. Backup replicas are stored in replication vaults.
                                +
                                Figure 1 CBR architecture
                                +
                                +

                                Who Can Use the Backup Function?

                                Only users with the CBR FullAccess permissions can use the cloud disk backup function. If the user does not have the permissions, contact the account administrator to grant the permissions first.

                                +

                                Application Scenarios

                                Create and apply backup policies to schedule periodic backups for your EVS disks. You can use the backup data to create new EVS disks or restore to source disks.

                                -

                                Usage Instructions

                                For how to back up EVS disks, see Managing EVS Backups or the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

                                +

                                Usage Instructions

                                For how to back up EVS disks, see Managing EVS Backups or Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

                                diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0024.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0024.html index 961cb640..551e580a 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0024.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0024.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@

                                EVS replication APIs have been deprecated. If you need to use the replication function, see Storage Disaster Recovery Service User Guide and Storage Disaster Recovery Service API Reference.

                                -

                                Procedure

                                1. Log in to the management console.
                                2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                                3. Under Computing, click Elastic Cloud Server.

                                  The Elastic Cloud Server page is displayed.

                                  +

                                  Procedure

                                  1. Log in to the management console.
                                  2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                                  3. Under Compute, click Elastic Cloud Server.

                                    The Elastic Cloud Server page is displayed.

                                  4. Click the name of the production ECS.

                                    The ECS details page is displayed.

                                  5. Take note of the production ECS information, including the ECS specifications, details of the EVS disks attached to the ECS, private IP address, and security group, as shown in Table 1.

                                    The listed parameter values are for reference only.

                                    @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@

Memory

8 GB

+

8 GiB

Image

@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@

Capacity

  • System disk: 500 GB
  • Data disk: 2000 GB
+
  • System disk: 500 GiB
  • Data disk: 2,000 GiB

Disk type

diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0026.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0026.html index 24d4d95b..7131989a 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0026.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0026.html @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@

Prerequisites

You have obtained the VPC, subnet, MAC address, and virtual IP address of the production server. For details, see Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated).

Procedure

The following operations are for reference only. For details, see Assigning a Virtual IP Address in the Virtual Private Cloud User Guide.

-
  1. Log in to the management console.
  2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
  3. Under Computing, click Elastic Cloud Server.

    The Elastic Cloud Server page is displayed.

    +
    1. Log in to the management console.
    2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
    3. Under Compute, click Elastic Cloud Server.

      The Elastic Cloud Server page is displayed.

    4. In the ECS list, locate the production ECS and click the ECS name.

      The ECS details page is displayed.

    5. On the ECS details page, locate the VPC and click the VPC name.

      The Virtual Private Cloud page is displayed.

    6. In the VPC list, locate the VPC of the production ECS and click the VPC name.

      The VPC details page is displayed.

      @@ -19,21 +19,21 @@
    7. If no, perform the following operations:
      1. Click Assign Virtual IP Address.

        After the application succeeds, you can view the virtual IP address in the virtual IP address list.

        When assigning the virtual IP address, you can select the Automatic or Manual mode based on your service requirements.

        -
      2. Locate the row that contains the virtual IP address and click Bind to Server in the Operation column. On the displayed page, bind the virtual IP address to the NIC of the production server.

        After the virtual IP address is bound with the production server, the subnet details page is displayed.

        -
      3. Locate the row that contains the virtual IP address and click Bind to Server in the Operation column. On the displayed page, bind the virtual IP address to the NIC of the DR server.

        After the virtual IP address is bound with the DR server, the subnet details page is displayed.

        +
      4. Locate the row that contains the virtual IP address and click Bind to Server in the Operation column. On the displayed page, bind the virtual IP address to the NIC of the production server.

        After the virtual IP address is bound with the production server, the subnet details page is displayed.

        +
      5. Locate the row that contains the virtual IP address and click Bind to Server in the Operation column. On the displayed page, bind the virtual IP address to the NIC of the DR server.

        After the virtual IP address is bound with the DR server, the subnet details page is displayed.

    8. On the subnet details page, take note of the subnet and the IP address of the server's NIC where the virtual IP address has been bound.

      An example is provided as follows:
      • Subnet: 192.168.0.0/24
      • Bound server (NIC): ecs-001 (192.168.0.176)
      -

    9. After a virtual IP address is bound with a server, perform the following substeps to configure the bound IP address as the static IP address:

      The following example uses CentOS 7.2 64bit as the sample OS.

      The configuration method varies depending on the server OS. This document is used for reference only. For the detailed operations and differences, see the corresponding OS documents.

      +

    10. After a virtual IP address is bound with a server, perform the following substeps to configure the bound IP address as the static IP address:

      The following example uses CentOS 7.2 64bit as the sample OS.

      The configuration method varies depending on the server OS. This document is used for reference only. For detailed operations and differences, see the corresponding OS documents.

      For the Windows OS, see the Microsoft official documentation.

      1. Log in to the server as user root.
      2. Run the following command to check the name of the NIC bound with the virtual IP address in the server:

        ifconfig

        You can obtain the NIC name using the NIC IP address recorded in 9. In this example, the NIC name is eth0.

      3. Run the following command to switch to the directory containing NIC configuration files:

        cd /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts

      4. Run the following command to copy NIC configuration file eth0 and change its name to eth0:1:

        cp eth0 eth0:1

        -
      5. Perform the following operations to modify the configuration parameters of eth0:1 using the vi editor:
        1. Run the following command to open the ifcfg-eth0:1 file:

          vi ifcfg-eth0:1

          -
        2. Press i to enter editing mode.
        3. Configure the parameters according to the following example:
          BOOTPROTO=static
          +
        4. Perform the following operations to modify the configuration parameters of eth0:1 using the vi editor:
          1. Run the following command to open the ifcfg-eth0:1 file:

            vi ifcfg-eth0:1

            +
          2. Press i to enter editing mode.
          3. Configure the parameters according to the following example:
            BOOTPROTO=static
             DEVICE=eth0:1
             NAME=eth0:1
             ONBOOT=yes
            @@ -41,29 +41,29 @@ TYPE=Ethernet
             USERCTL=no
             IPADDR=192.168.0.176
             NETMASK=255.255.255.0
            -
            Configuration descriptions of the NAME, IPADDR, and NETMASK fields:
            • NAME: Specifies the NIC name recorded in 10.b.
            • IPADDR: Specifies the NIC IP address recorded in 9.
            • NETMASK: Specifies the subnet recorded in 9.

              In this example, the subnet mask has 24 bits. Therefore, enter 255.255.255.0 for NETMASK.

              +
              Configuration descriptions of the NAME, IPADDR, and NETMASK fields:
              • NAME: Specifies the NIC name recorded in 10.b.
              • IPADDR: Specifies the NIC IP address recorded in 9.
              • NETMASK: Specifies the subnet recorded in 9.

                In this example, the subnet mask has 24 bits. Therefore, enter 255.255.255.0 for NETMASK.

              -
            • Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

              The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

              +
            • Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

              The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

        5. Run the following command to delete unnecessary NIC files from the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory:

          rm Name of the unnecessary NIC file

          -

          For example, run the following command:

          +

          In this example, run the following commands:

          rm ifcfg-eth1

          Before deleting the unnecessary NIC files, you are advised to back up the files.

          If multiple unnecessary NIC files exist, delete them individually. Ensure that the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory contains only the in-use NIC file.

          -
        6. Run the following command to check whether the 70-persistent-ipoib.rules file exists in the /etc/udev/rules.d/ directory:
          ls /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-ipoib.rules
          • If yes, use the vi editor to configure the NIC information, including the NIC name and MAC address, for production and DR servers.
            1. Run the following command to open the 70-persistent-ipoib.rules file:

              vi /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-ipoib.rules

              -
            2. Press i to enter editing mode.
            3. Add NIC information for the DR server based on that of the production server. For details, see the following example:
              ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="net", DRIVERS=="?*", ATTR{type}=="32", ATTR{address}=={mac}, NAME="eth0" 
              +
            4. Run the following command to check whether the 70-persistent-ipoib.rules file exists in the /etc/udev/rules.d/ directory:
              ls /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-ipoib.rules
              • If yes, use the vi editor to configure the NIC information, including the NIC name and MAC address, for production and DR servers.
                1. Run the following command to open the 70-persistent-ipoib.rules file:

                  vi /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-ipoib.rules

                  +
                2. Press i to enter editing mode.
                3. Add NIC information for the DR server based on that of the production server. For details, see the following example:
                  ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="net", DRIVERS=="?*", ATTR{type}=="32", ATTR{address}=={mac}, NAME="eth0" 
                   ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="net", DRIVERS=="?*", ATTR{type}=="32", ATTR{address}=={mac}, NAME="eth1"
                   
                   ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="net", DRIVERS=="?*", ATTR{type}=="32", ATTR{address}=={mac}, NAME="eth0" 
                   ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="net", DRIVERS=="?*", ATTR{type}=="32", ATTR{address}=={mac}, NAME="eth1"
                  -

                  Configuration descriptions of the ATTR{address} and NAME fields:

                  -
                  • ATTR{address}: specifies the MAC address of server's NIC.
                  • NAME: Specifies the NIC name recorded in 10.b.

                    a. Ensure that the NAME (NIC name) values of the production and DR servers are consistent. The ATTR{address} (MAC address) value can be obtained in Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated).

                    +

                    Configuration descriptions of the ATTR{address} and NAME fields:

                    +
                    • ATTR{address}: specifies the MAC address of server's NIC.
                    • NAME: Specifies the NIC name recorded in 10.b.

                      a. Ensure that the NAME (NIC name) values of the production and DR servers are consistent. The ATTR{address} (MAC address) value can be obtained in Collecting ECS Information (Deprecated).

                      b. Replace {mac} with the MAC address during operation.

                    -
                  • Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                    The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                    +
                  • Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                    The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

              • If no, go to 10.h.
              diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0033.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0033.html index 86bb6477..a97774fa 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0033.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0033.html @@ -1,19 +1,22 @@

              Initializing a Linux Data Disk (fdisk)

              -

              Scenarios

              This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use fdisk to partition the data disk.

              -

              The maximum partition size that MBR supports is 2 TiB and that GPT supports is 18 EiB. If the disk size you need to partition is greater than 2 TiB, partition the disk using GPT.

              -

              The fdisk partitioning tool is suitable only for MBR partitions, and the parted partitioning tool is suitable for both MBR and GPT partitions. For more information, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

              -

              The method for initializing a disk varies depending on the OS running on the server. This document is used for reference only. For the detailed operations and differences, see the product documents of the corresponding OS.

              +

              Scenarios

              This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use fdisk to partition the data disk.

              +

              The maximum partition size that MBR supports is 2 TiB and that GPT supports is 18 EiB. If the disk size you need to partition is greater than 2 TiB, partition the disk using GPT.

              +

              The fdisk partitioning tool is suitable only for MBR partitions, and the parted partitioning tool is suitable for both MBR and GPT partitions. For more information, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

              +

              The method for initializing a disk varies slightly depending on the OS running on the server. This document is used for reference only. For the detailed operations and differences, see the product documents of the corresponding OS.

              +

              When using a disk for the first time, if you have not initialized it, including creating partitions and file systems, the additional space added to this disk in an expansion later may not be normally used.

              +
              -

              Prerequisites

              • A data disk has been attached to a server and has not been initialized.
              • You have logged in to the server.
                • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
                +

                Prerequisites

                • A data disk has been attached to a server and has not been initialized.
                • You have logged in to the server.
                  • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                  • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
                -

                Creating and Mounting a Partition

                The following example shows you how a new primary partition can be created on a new data disk that has been attached to a server. The primary partition will be created using fdisk, and MBR will be used. Furthermore, the partition will be formatted using the ext4 file system, mounted on /mnt/sdc, and configured with automatic mounting at system start.

                +

                Creating and Mounting a Partition

                The following example shows you how a new primary partition can be created on a new data disk that has been attached to a server. The primary partition will be created using fdisk, and MBR will be used. Furthermore, the partition will be formatted using the ext4 file system, mounted on /mnt/sdc, and configured to mount automatically at startup.

                -
                1. fdisk -l

                  Information similar to the following is displayed:
                  [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# fdisk -l
                  +
                  1. Query what block devices are available on the server.

                    fdisk -l

                    +
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# fdisk -l
                     
                    -Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                    +Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GiB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                     Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                     Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                     I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                    @@ -23,16 +26,16 @@ Disk identifier: 0x000bcb4e
                        Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
                     /dev/vda1   *        2048    83886079    41942016   83  Linux
                     
                    -Disk /dev/vdb: 107.4 GB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                    +Disk /dev/vdb: 107.4 GiB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                     Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                     Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                     I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                    -

                    In the command output, the server contains two disks. /dev/vda is the system disk, and /dev/vdb is the new data disk.

                    -

                  2. Run the following command to enter fdisk to partition the new data disk:

                    fdisk New data disk

                    -

                    In this example, run the following command:

                    -

                    fdisk /dev/vdb

                    -
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# fdisk /dev/vdb
                    +

                    In the command output, this server contains two disks: /dev/vda and /dev/vdb. /dev/vda is the system disk, and /dev/vdb is the new data disk.

                    +

                  3. Launch fdisk to partition the new data disk.

                    fdisk New data disk

                    +

                    In this example, run the following command:

                    +

                    fdisk /dev/vdb

                    +
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# fdisk /dev/vdb
                     Welcome to fdisk (util-linux 2.23.2).
                     
                     Changes will remain in memory only, until you decide to write them.
                    @@ -43,41 +46,41 @@ Building a new DOS disklabel with disk identifier 0x38717fc1.
                     
                     Command (m for help): 
                    -

                  4. Enter n and press Enter to create a new partition.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): n
                    +

                  5. Enter n and press Enter to create a new partition.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): n
                     Partition type:
                        p   primary (0 primary, 0 extended, 4 free)
                        e   extended
                    -
                    There are two types of disk partitions:
                    • Choosing p creates a primary partition.
                    • Choosing e creates an extended partition.
                    -

                    If the MBR partition style is used, a maximum of 4 primary partitions, or 3 primary partitions and 1 extended partition can be created. The extended partition cannot be used directly and must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                    -

                    Disk partitions created using GPT are not categorized.

                    +
                    There are two types of disk partitions:
                    • Choosing p creates a primary partition.
                    • Choosing e creates an extended partition.
                    +

                    If MBR is used, a maximum of four primary partitions, or three primary partitions plus one extended partition can be created. The extended partition must be divided into logical partitions before use.

                    +

                    Disk partitions created using GPT are not categorized.

                    -

                  6. In this example, a primary partition is created. Therefore, enter p and press Enter to create a primary partition.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Select (default p): p
                    +

                  7. Enter p and press Enter to create a primary partition in this example.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Select (default p): p
                     Partition number (1-4, default 1): 
                    -

                    Partition number indicates the serial number of the primary partition. The value ranges from 1 to 4.

                    -

                  8. Enter the serial number of the primary partition and press Enter. Primary partition number 1 is used in this example. One usually starts with partition number 1 when partitioning an empty disk.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Partition number (1-4, default 1): 1
                    +

                    Partition number indicates the serial number of the primary partition. The value ranges from 1 to 4.

                    +

                  9. Enter the serial number of the primary partition and press Enter. Primary partition number 1 is used in this example. One usually starts with partition number 1 when partitioning an empty disk.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Partition number (1-4, default 1): 1
                     First sector (2048-209715199, default 2048):
                    -

                    First sector indicates the start sector. The value ranges from 2048 to 209715199, and the default value is 2048.

                    -

                  10. Select the default start sector 2048 and press Enter.

                    The system displays the start and end sectors of the partition's available space. You can customize the value within this range or use the default value. The start sector must be smaller than the partition's end sector.

                    -
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    First sector (2048-209715199, default 2048):
                    +

                    First sector indicates the start sector. The value ranges from 2048 to 209715199, and the default value is 2048.

                    +

                  11. Select the default start sector 2048 and press Enter.

                    The system displays the start and end sectors of the partition's available space. You can customize the value within this range or use the default value. The start sector must be smaller than the partition's end sector.

                    +
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    First sector (2048-209715199, default 2048):
                     Using default value 2048
                     Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (2048-209715199, default 209715199):
                    -

                    Last sector indicates the end sector. The value ranges from 2048 to 209715199, and the default value is 209715199.

                    -

                  12. Select the default end sector 209715199 and press Enter.

                    The system displays the start and end sectors of the partition's available space. You can customize the value within this range or use the default value. The start sector must be smaller than the partition's end sector.

                    -

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:

                    -
                    Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (2048-209715199, default 209715199):
                    +

                    Last sector indicates the end sector. The value ranges from 2048 to 209715199, and the default value is 209715199.

                    +

                  13. Select the default end sector 209715199 and press Enter.

                    The system displays the start and end sectors of the partition's available space. You can customize the value within this range or use the default value. The start sector must be smaller than the partition's end sector.

                    +

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:

                    +
                    Last sector, +sectors or +size{K,M,G} (2048-209715199, default 209715199):
                     Using default value 209715199
                     Partition 1 of type Linux and of size 100 GiB is set
                     
                     Command (m for help):
                    -

                    A primary partition has been created for the new data disk.

                    -

                  14. Enter p and press Enter to view details about the new partition.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): p
                    +

                    A primary partition has been created for the new data disk.

                    +

                  15. Enter p and press Enter to print the partition details.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): p
                     
                    -Disk /dev/vdb: 107.4 GB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                    +Disk /dev/vdb: 107.4 GiB, 107374182400 bytes, 209715200 sectors
                     Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                     Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                     I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                    @@ -89,21 +92,21 @@ Disk identifier: 0x38717fc1
                     
                     Command (m for help):
                    -

                    Details about the /dev/vdb1 partition are displayed.

                    -

                  16. Enter w and press Enter to write the changes to the partition table.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): w
                    +

                    Details about the /dev/vdb1 partition are displayed.

                    +

                  17. Enter w and press Enter to write the changes to the partition table.

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    Command (m for help): w
                     The partition table has been altered!
                     
                     Calling ioctl() to re-read partition table.
                     Syncing disks.
                    -

                    The partition is created.

                    -

                    In case that you want to discard the changes made before, you can exit fdisk by entering q.

                    +

                    The partition is created.

                    +

                    In case that you want to discard the changes made before, you can exit fdisk by entering q.

                    -

                  18. Run the following command to synchronize the new partition table to the OS:

                    partprobe

                    -

                  19. Run the following command to set the file system format for the new partition:

                    mkfs -t File system format /dev/vdb1

                    -

                    In this example, run the following command to set the ext4 file system for the new partition:

                    -

                    mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1

                    -
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1
                    +

                  20. Synchronize the new partition table to the OS.

                    partprobe

                    +

                  21. Format the new partition with a desired file system format.

                    mkfs -t File system format /dev/vdb1

                    +

                    In this example, the ext4 format is used for the new partition.

                    +

                    mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1

                    +
                    Information similar to the following is displayed:
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1
                     mke2fs 1.42.9 (28-Dec-2013)
                     Filesystem label=
                     OS type: Linux
                    @@ -126,20 +129,20 @@ Writing inode tables: done
                     Creating journal (32768 blocks): done
                     Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done
                    -

                    The formatting takes a period of time. Observe the system running status and do not exit.

                    -

                    The partition sizes supported by file systems vary. Therefore, you are advised to choose an appropriate file system based on your service requirements.

                    +

                    The formatting takes a period of time. Observe the system running status and do not exit.

                    +

                    The partition sizes supported by file systems vary. Choose an appropriate file system format based on your service requirements.

                    -

                  22. Run the following command to create a mount point:

                    mkdir Mount point

                    -

                    In this example, run the following command to create the /mnt/sdc mount point:

                    -

                    mkdir /mnt/sdc

                    -

                    The /mnt directory exists on all Linux systems. If the mount point fails to create, it may be that the /mnt directory has been accidentally deleted. Run the mkdir -p /mnt/sdc command to create the mount point.

                    +

                  23. Create a mount point.

                    mkdir Mount point

                    +

                    In this example, the /mnt/sdc mount point is created.

                    +

                    mkdir /mnt/sdc

                    +

                    The /mnt directory exists on all Linux systems. If the mount point cannot be created, it may be that the /mnt directory has been accidentally deleted. You can run mkdir -p /mnt/sdc to create the mount point.

                    -

                  24. Run the following command to mount the new partition on the created mount point:

                    mount Disk partition Mount point

                    -

                    In this example, run the following command to mount the new partition /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc:

                    -

                    mount /dev/vdb1 /mnt/sdc

                    -

                  25. Run the following command to view the mount result:

                    df -TH

                    -

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:

                    -
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# df -TH
                    +

                  26. Mount the new partition on the created mount point.

                    mount Disk partition Mount point

                    +

                    In this example, the /dev/vdb1 partition is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                    +

                    mount /dev/vdb1 /mnt/sdc

                    +

                  27. Check the mount result.

                    df -TH

                    +

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:

                    +
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# df -TH
                     Filesystem     Type      Size  Used Avail Use% Mounted on
                     /dev/vda1      ext4       43G  1.9G   39G   5% /
                     devtmpfs       devtmpfs  2.0G     0  2.0G   0% /dev
                    @@ -148,33 +151,33 @@ tmpfs          tmpfs     2.0G  9.1M  2.0G   1% /run
                     tmpfs          tmpfs     2.0G     0  2.0G   0% /sys/fs/cgroup
                     tmpfs          tmpfs     398M     0  398M   0% /run/user/0
                     /dev/vdb1      ext4      106G   63M  101G   1% /mnt/sdc
                    -

                    New partition /dev/vdb1 is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                    -

                    If the server is restarted, the mounting will become invalid. You can set automatic mounting for partitions at system start by modifying the /etc/fstab file. For details, see Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                    +

                    You should now see that partition /dev/vdb1 is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                    +

                    After the server is restarted, the disk will not be automatically mounted. You can modify the /etc/fstab file to configure automount at startup. For details, see Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                  -

                  Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start

                  Modify the fstab file to set automatic disk mounting at server start. You can also set automatic mounting for the servers containing data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                  -

                  The following procedure shows how to set automatic disk mounting at server start by using UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names to identify disks in the file because a device name may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) during the server stop or start, resulting in improper server running after restart.

                  -

                  UUID is the unique character string for disk partitions in a Linux system.

                  +

                  Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start

                  The fstab file controls what disks are automatically mounted at startup. You can use fstab to configure your data disks to mount automatically. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                  +

                  The example here uses UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names to identify disks in the file because device names are assigned dynamically and may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) after a server stop or start. This can even prevent the server from booting up.

                  +

                  UUIDs are the unique character strings for identifying partitions in Linux.

                  -
                  1. Run the following command to query the partition UUID:

                    blkid Disk partition

                    -

                    In this example, run the following command to query the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition:

                    -

                    blkid /dev/vdb1

                    -

                    Information similar to the following is displayed:

                    -
                    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                    +
                    1. Query the partition UUID.

                      blkid Disk partition

                      +

                      In this example, the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is queried.

                      +

                      blkid /dev/vdb1

                      +

                      Information similar to the following is displayed:

                      +
                      [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                       /dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"
                      -

                      The UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is displayed.

                      -

                    2. Run the following command to open the fstab file using the vi editor:

                      vi /etc/fstab

                      -

                    3. Press i to enter editing mode.
                    4. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                      UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                      -

                    5. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                      The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                      -

                    6. Perform the following operations to verify the automatic mounting function:

                      1. Run the following command to unmount the partition:

                        umount Disk partition

                        -

                        In this example, run the following command:

                        -

                        umount /dev/vdb1

                        -
                      2. Run the following command to reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file:

                        mount -a

                        -
                      3. Run the following command to query the file system mounting information:

                        mount | grep Mount point

                        -

                        In this example, run the following command:

                        -

                        mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                        -

                        If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                        -
                        root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                        +

                        Carefully record the UUID, as you will need it for the following step.

                        +

                      4. Open the fstab file using the vi editor.

                        vi /etc/fstab

                        +

                      5. Press i to enter editing mode.
                      6. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                        UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                        +

                      7. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                        The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                        +

                      8. Verify that the disk is auto-mounted at startup.

                        1. Unmount the partition.

                          umount Disk partition

                          +

                          In this example, run the following command:

                          +

                          umount /dev/vdb1

                          +
                        2. Reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file.

                          mount -a

                          +
                        3. Query the file system mounting information.

                          mount | grep Mount point

                          +

                          In this example, run the following command:

                          +

                          mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                          +

                          If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                          +
                          root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                           /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc type ext4 (rw,relatime,data=ordered)

                      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0034.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0034.html index a493a72a..c70710d9 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0034.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0034.html @@ -1,53 +1,55 @@

                      Initializing a Linux Data Disk (parted)

                      -

                      Scenarios

                      This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use parted to partition the data disk.

                      -

                      The maximum partition size that MBR supports is 2 TiB and that GPT supports is 18 EiB. If the disk size you need to partition is greater than 2 TiB, partition the disk using GPT.

                      -

                      The fdisk partitioning tool is suitable only for MBR partitions, and the parted partitioning tool is suitable for both MBR and GPT partitions. For more information, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

                      -

                      The method for initializing a disk varies depending on the OS running on the server. This document is used for reference only. For the detailed operations and differences, see the product documents of the corresponding OS.

                      +

                      Scenarios

                      This section uses CentOS 7.4 64bit to describe how to initialize a data disk attached to a server running Linux and use parted to partition the data disk.

                      +

                      The maximum partition size that MBR supports is 2 TiB and that GPT supports is 18 EiB. If the disk size you need to partition is greater than 2 TiB, partition the disk using GPT.

                      +

                      The fdisk partitioning tool is suitable only for MBR partitions, and the parted partitioning tool is suitable for both MBR and GPT partitions. For more information, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

                      +

                      The method for initializing a disk varies slightly depending on the OS running on the server. This document is used for reference only. For the detailed operations and differences, see the product documents of the corresponding OS.

                      +

                      When using a disk for the first time, if you have not initialized it, including creating partitions and file systems, the additional space added to this disk in an expansion later may not be normally used.

                      +
                      -

                      Prerequisites

                      • A data disk has been attached to a server and has not been initialized.
                      • You have logged in to the server.
                        • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                        • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
                        +

                        Prerequisites

                        • A data disk has been attached to a server and has not been initialized.
                        • You have logged in to the server.
                          • For how to log in to an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                          • For how to log in to a BMS, see the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
                        -

                        Creating and Mounting a Partition

                        The following example shows you how a new partition can be created on a new data disk that has been attached to a server. The partition will be created using parted, and GPT will be used. Furthermore, the partition will be formatted using the ext4 file system, mounted on /mnt/sdc, and configured with automatic mounting at system start.

                        +

                        Creating and Mounting a Partition

                        The following example shows you how a new partition can be created on a new data disk that has been attached to a server. The partition will be created using parted, and GPT will be used. Furthermore, the partition will be formatted using the ext4 file system, mounted on /mnt/sdc, and configured to mount automatically at startup.

                        -
                        1. Run the following command to query information about the new data disk:

                          lsblk

                          -
                          Information similar to the following is displayed:
                          root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# lsblk
                          +
                          1. Query information about the new data disk.

                            lsblk

                            +
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# lsblk
                             NAME   MAJ:MIN RM  SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
                             vda    253:0    0   40G  0 disk
                             └─vda1 253:1    0   40G  0 part /
                             vdb    253:16   0  100G  0 disk
                            -

                            In the command output, the server contains two disks. /dev/vda is the system disk, and /dev/vdb is the new data disk.

                            -

                          2. Run the following command to enter parted to partition the new data disk:

                            parted New data disk

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command:

                            -

                            parted /dev/vdb

                            -
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# parted /dev/vdb
                            +

                            In the command output, this server contains two disks. /dev/vda and /dev/vdb. /dev/vda is the system disk, and /dev/vdb is the new data disk.

                            +

                          3. Launch parted to partition the new data disk.

                            parted New data disk

                            +

                            In this example, run the following command:

                            +

                            parted /dev/vdb

                            +
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# parted /dev/vdb
                             GNU Parted 3.1
                             Using /dev/vdb
                             Welcome to GNU Parted! Type 'help' to view a list of commands.
                             (parted) 
                            -

                          4. Enter p and press Enter to view the current disk partition style.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) p
                            +

                          5. Enter p and press Enter to view the current disk partition style.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) p
                             Error: /dev/vdb: unrecognised disk label
                             Model: Virtio Block Device (virtblk)
                            -Disk /dev/vdb: 107GB
                            +Disk /dev/vdb: 107GiB
                             Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
                             Partition Table: unknown
                             Disk Flags:
                             (parted) 
                            -

                            In the command output, the Partition Table value is unknown, indicating that no partition style is set for the new disk.

                            -

                          6. Run the following command to set the disk partition style:

                            mklabel Disk partition style

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to set the partition style to GPT: (Disk partition styles can be MBR or GPT.)

                            -

                            mklabel gpt

                            -

                            The maximum disk size supported by MBR is 2 TiB, and that supported by GPT is 18 EiB. Because an EVS data disk currently supports up to 32 TiB, use GPT if your disk size is larger than 2 TiB.

                            -

                            If the partition style is changed after the disk has been used, data on the disk will be cleared. Therefore, select an appropriate partition style when initializing the disk. If you must change the partition style to GPT after a disk has been used, it is recommended that you back up the disk data before the change.

                            +

                            In the command output, the Partition Table value is unknown, indicating that no partition style is set for the new disk.

                            +

                          7. Set the disk partition style.

                            mklabel Disk partition style

                            +

                            This command lets you control whether to use MBR or GPT for your partition table. In this example, GPT is used.

                            +

                            mklabel gpt

                            +

                            The maximum disk size supported by MBR is 2 TiB, and that supported by GPT is 18 EiB. Because an EVS data disk currently supports up to 32 TiB, use GPT if your disk size is larger than 2 TiB.

                            +

                            If the partition style is changed after the disk has been used, all data on the disk will be lost, so take care to select an appropriate partition style when initializing the disk. If you must change the partition style to GPT after a disk has been used, it is recommended that you back up the disk data before the change.

                            -

                          8. Enter p and press Enter to view the disk partition style.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) mklabel gpt
                            +

                          9. Enter p and press Enter to view the disk partition style.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) mklabel gpt
                             (parted) p
                             Model: Virtio Block Device (virtblk)
                            -Disk /dev/vdb: 107GB
                            +Disk /dev/vdb: 107GiB
                             Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
                             Partition Table: gpt
                             Disk Flags:
                            @@ -56,15 +58,15 @@ Number  Start  End  Size  File system  Name  Flags
                             
                             (parted) 
                            -

                            In the command output, the Partition Table value is gpt, indicating that the disk partition style is GPT.

                            -

                          10. Enter unit s and press Enter to set the measurement unit of the disk to sector.
                          11. Run the following command and press Enter:

                            mkpart Partition name Start sector End sector

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command:

                            -

                            mkpart test 2048s 100%

                            -

                            In this example, one partition is created for the new data disk. Variable 2048s indicates the disk start sector, and variable 100% indicates the disk end sector. The two values are used for reference only. You can determine the number of partitions and the partition size based on your service requirements.

                            -
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) mkpart opt 2048s 100%
                            +

                            In the command output, the Partition Table value is gpt, indicating that the disk partition style is GPT.

                            +

                          12. Enter unit s and press Enter to set the measurement unit of the disk to sector.
                          13. Create a new partition.

                            mkpart Partition name Start sector End sector

                            +

                            In this example, run the following command:

                            +

                            mkpart test 2048s 100%

                            +

                            In this example, one partition is created for the new data disk, starting on 2048 and using 100% of the rest of the disk. The two values are used for reference only. You can determine the number of partitions and the partition size based on your service requirements.

                            +
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) mkpart opt 2048s 100%
                             (parted)
                            -

                          14. Enter p and press Enter to view details about the new partition.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) p
                            +

                          15. Enter p and press Enter to print the partition details.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) p
                             Model: Virtio Block Device (virtblk)
                             Disk /dev/vdb: 209715200s
                             Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
                            @@ -76,23 +78,23 @@ Number  Start  End         Size        File system  Name  Flags
                             
                             (parted) 
                            -

                          16. Enter q and press Enter to exit parted.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) q
                            +

                          17. Enter q and press Enter to exit parted.

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            (parted) q
                             Information: You may need to update /etc/fstab.
                            -

                            You can set automatic disk mounting by updating the /etc/fstab file. Before updating the file, set the file system format for the partition and mount the partition on the mount point.

                            -

                          18. Run the following command to view the disk partition information:

                            lsblk

                            -
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# lsblk
                            +

                            You can configure automatic mounting by updating the /etc/fstab file. Before doing so, format the partition with a desired file system and mount the partition on the mount point.

                            +

                          19. View the disk partition information.

                            lsblk

                            +
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# lsblk
                             NAME   MAJ:MIN RM  SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
                             vda    253:0    0   40G  0 disk
                             └─vda1 253:1    0   40G  0 part /
                             vdb    253:16   0  100G  0 disk
                             └─vdb1 253:17   0  100G  0 part
                            -

                            In the command output, /dev/vdb1 is the partition you created.

                            -

                          20. Run the following command to set the file system format for the new partition:

                            mkfs -t File system format /dev/vdb1

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to set the ext4 file system for the new partition:

                            -

                            mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1

                            -
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1
                            +

                            In the command output, /dev/vdb1 is the partition you created.

                            +

                          21. Format the new partition with a desired file system format.

                            mkfs -t File system format /dev/vdb1

                            +

                            In this example, the ext4 format is used for the new partition.

                            +

                            mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1

                            +
                            Information similar to the following is displayed:
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/vdb1
                             mke2fs 1.42.9 (28-Dec-2013)
                             Filesystem label=
                             OS type: Linux
                            @@ -115,20 +117,20 @@ Writing inode tables: done
                             Creating journal (32768 blocks): done
                             Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done
                            -

                            The formatting takes a period of time. Observe the system running status and do not exit.

                            -

                            The partition sizes supported by file systems vary. Therefore, you are advised to choose an appropriate file system based on your service requirements.

                            +

                            The formatting takes a period of time. Observe the system running status and do not exit.

                            +

                            The partition sizes supported by file systems vary. Choose an appropriate file system format based on your service requirements.

                            -

                          22. Run the following command to create a mount point:

                            mkdir Mount point

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to create the /mnt/sdc mount point:

                            -

                            mkdir /mnt/sdc

                            -

                            The /mnt directory exists on all Linux systems. If the mount point fails to create, it may be that the /mnt directory has been accidentally deleted. Run the mkdir -p /mnt/sdc command to create the mount point.

                            +

                          23. Create a mount point.

                            mkdir Mount point

                            +

                            In this example, the /mnt/sdc mount point is created.

                            +

                            mkdir /mnt/sdc

                            +

                            The /mnt directory exists on all Linux systems. If the mount point cannot be created, it may be that the /mnt directory has been accidentally deleted. You can run mkdir -p /mnt/sdc to create the mount point.

                            -

                          24. Run the following command to mount the new partition on the created mount point:

                            mount Disk partition Mount point

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to mount the new partition /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc:

                            -

                            mount /dev/vdb1 /mnt/sdc

                            -

                          25. Run the following command to view the mount result:

                            df -TH

                            -

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:

                            -
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# df -TH
                            +

                          26. Mount the new partition on the created mount point.

                            mount Disk partition Mount point

                            +

                            In this example, the /dev/vdb1 partition is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                            +

                            mount /dev/vdb1 /mnt/sdc

                            +

                          27. Check the mount result.

                            df -TH

                            +

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:

                            +
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# df -TH
                             Filesystem     Type      Size  Used Avail Use% Mounted on
                             /dev/vda1      ext4       43G  1.9G   39G   5% /
                             devtmpfs       devtmpfs  2.0G     0  2.0G   0% /dev
                            @@ -137,33 +139,33 @@ tmpfs          tmpfs     2.0G  9.0M  2.0G   1% /run
                             tmpfs          tmpfs     2.0G     0  2.0G   0% /sys/fs/cgroup
                             tmpfs          tmpfs     398M     0  398M   0% /run/user/0
                             /dev/vdb1      ext4      106G   63M  101G   1% /mnt/sdc
                            -

                            New partition /dev/vdb1 is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                            -

                            If the server is restarted, the mounting will become invalid. You can set automatic mounting for partitions at system start by modifying the /etc/fstab file. For details, see Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                            +

                            You should now see that partition /dev/vdb1 is mounted on /mnt/sdc.

                            +

                            After the server is restarted, the disk will not be automatically mounted. You can modify the /etc/fstab file to configure automount at startup. For details, see Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start.

                          -

                          Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start

                          Modify the fstab file to set automatic disk mounting at server start. You can also set automatic mounting for the servers containing data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                          -

                          The following procedure shows how to set automatic disk mounting at server start by using UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names to identify disks in the file because a device name may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) during the server stop or start, resulting in improper server running after restart.

                          -

                          UUID is the unique character string for disk partitions in a Linux system.

                          +

                          Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start

                          The fstab file controls what disks are automatically mounted at server startup. You can configure the fstab file of a server that has data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

                          +

                          The following example uses UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names (like /dev/vdb1) to identify disks in the file because device names are assigned dynamically and may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) after a server stop or start. This can even prevent your server from booting up.

                          +

                          UUIDs are the unique character strings for identifying partitions in Linux.

                          -
                          1. Run the following command to query the partition UUID:

                            blkid Disk partition

                            -

                            In this example, run the following command to query the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition:

                            -

                            blkid /dev/vdb1

                            -

                            Information similar to the following is displayed:

                            -
                            [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                            +
                            1. Query the partition UUID.

                              blkid Disk partition

                              +

                              In this example, the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is queried.

                              +

                              blkid /dev/vdb1

                              +

                              Information similar to the following is displayed:

                              +
                              [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                               /dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"
                              -

                              The UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is displayed.

                              -

                            2. Run the following command to open the fstab file using the vi editor:

                              vi /etc/fstab

                              -

                            3. Press i to enter editing mode.
                            4. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                              UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                              -

                            5. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                              The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                              -

                            6. Perform the following operations to verify the automatic mounting function:

                              1. Run the following command to unmount the partition:

                                umount Disk partition

                                -

                                In this example, run the following command:

                                -

                                umount /dev/vdb1

                                -
                              2. Run the following command to reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file:

                                mount -a

                                -
                              3. Run the following command to query the file system mounting information:

                                mount | grep Mount point

                                -

                                In this example, run the following command:

                                -

                                mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                                -

                                If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                                -
                                root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                                +

                                Carefully record the UUID, as you will need it for the following step.

                                +

                              4. Open the fstab file using the vi editor.

                                vi /etc/fstab

                                +

                              5. Press i to enter editing mode.
                              6. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

                                UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
                                +

                              7. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                                The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                                +

                              8. Verify that the disk is auto-mounted at startup.

                                1. Unmount the partition.

                                  umount Disk partition

                                  +

                                  In this example, run the following command:

                                  +

                                  umount /dev/vdb1

                                  +
                                2. Reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file.

                                  mount -a

                                  +
                                3. Query the file system mounting information.

                                  mount | grep Mount point

                                  +

                                  In this example, run the following command:

                                  +

                                  mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                                  +

                                  If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                                  +
                                  root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                                   /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc type ext4 (rw,relatime,data=ordered)

                              diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0035.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0035.html index 62367144..c53d8345 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0035.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0035.html @@ -74,10 +74,12 @@ vdb 253:16 0 150G 0 disk └─vdb1 253:17 0 100G 0 part /mnt/sdc

                          In this example, data disk /dev/vdb already has partition /dev/vdb1 before capacity expansion, and the additional 50 GiB added has not been allocated yet. Therefore, /dev/vdb has 150 GiB, and /dev/vdb1 has 100 GiB.

                          +

                          If you run lsblk and find out that disk /dev/vdb has no partitions, format the disk by referring to How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux? and expand the capacity. Otherwise, the additional space cannot be used after expansion.

                          +

                        2. Run the following command to view the current disk partition style:

                          fdisk -l

                          Information similar to the following is displayed:
                          [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# fdisk -l
                           
                          -Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                          +Disk /dev/vda: 42.9 GiB, 42949672960 bytes, 83886080 sectors
                           Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                           Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                           I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                          @@ -87,7 +89,7 @@ Disk identifier: 0x000bcb4e
                              Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
                           /dev/vda1   *        2048    83886079    41942016   83  Linux
                           
                          -Disk /dev/vdb: 161.1 GB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                          +Disk /dev/vdb: 161.1 GiB, 161061273600 bytes, 314572800 sectors
                           Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
                           Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                           I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
                          @@ -98,10 +100,12 @@ Disk identifier: 0x38717fc1
                           /dev/vdb1            2048   209715199   104856576   83  Linux

                          The value in the System column indicates the disk partition style. Value Linux indicates the MBR partition style. Value GPT indicates the GPT partition style.

                          -
                          • If the disk partitions displayed are inconsistent with those obtained in 1, the partition that is not displayed uses the GPT partition style and has unallocated space. In this case, you cannot query all the partition information using the fdisk -l command. Go to Method 2: Check Partition Style and File System Format Using parted.
                          • If the disk partitions displayed are consistent with those obtained in 1, continue with the following operations.
                          +
                          • If the disk partitions displayed are inconsistent with those obtained in 1, the possible reason may be that existing partitions uses GPT and there is unallocated disk space. In this case, you cannot query all the partitions using fdisk -l. Go to Method 2: Check Partition Style and File System Format Using parted.
                          • If the disk partitions displayed are consistent with those obtained in 1, continue with the following operations.

                        3. Run the following command to view the partition's file system format:

                          blkid Disk partition

                          In this example, run the following command:

                          blkid /dev/vdb1

                          +
                          [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
                          +/dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"

                          In the command output, the TYPE value is ext4, indicating that /dev/vdb1's file system format is ext4.

                        4. Run the following command to view the file system status:

                          ext*: e2fsck -n Disk partition

                          xfs: xfs_repair -n Disk partition

                          @@ -113,7 +117,7 @@ Warning! /dev/vdb1 is mounted. Warning: skipping journal recovery because doing a read-only filesystem check. /dev/vdb1: clean, 11/6553600 files, 459544/26214144 blocks
                  -

                  If the file system status is clean, the file system status is normal. Otherwise, rectify the faulty and then perform the capacity expansion.

                  +

                  If the file system status is clean, the file system is normal. Otherwise, rectify the faulty and then perform the capacity expansion.

                Method 2: Check Partition Style and File System Format Using parted

                1. Run the following command to view all the disks attached to the server:

                  lsblk

                  @@ -125,6 +129,8 @@ vdb 253:16 0 150G 0 disk └─vdb1 253:17 0 100G 0 part /mnt/sdc

                In this example, data disk /dev/vdb already has partition /dev/vdb1 before capacity expansion, and the additional 50 GiB added has not been allocated yet. Therefore, /dev/vdb has 150 GiB, and /dev/vdb1 has 100 GiB.

                +

                If you run lsblk and find out that disk /dev/vdb has no partitions, format the disk by referring to How Do I Extend the File System of an Unpartitioned Data Disk in Linux? and expand the capacity. Otherwise, the additional space cannot be used after expansion.

                +

              • Run the following command and enter p to view the disk partition style:

                parted Disk

                For example, run the following command to view /dev/vdb's partition style:

                parted /dev/vdb

                @@ -140,17 +146,17 @@ Warning: Not all of the space available to /dev/vdb appears to be used, you can blocks) or continue with the current setting? Fix/Ignore? Fix Model: Virtio Block Device (virtblk) -Disk /dev/vdb: 161GB +Disk /dev/vdb: 161GiB Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B Partition Table: gpt Disk Flags: Number Start End Size File system Name Flags - 1 1049kB 107GB 107GB ext4 test + 1 1049kB 107GiB 107GiB ext4 test (parted)
              -
              In the command output, parameter Partition Table indicates the disk partition style. Value msdos indicates the MBR partition style, and value gpt indicates the GPT partition style.
              • If the following error information is displayed, enter Fix.
                Error: The backup GPT table is not at the end of the disk, as it should be.  This might mean that another operating system believes the
                +
                Partition Table indicates the disk partition style. Partition Table: msdos means MBR, Partition Table: gpt means GPT, and Partition Table: loop means that the whole disk is partitioned.
                • If the following error information is displayed, enter Fix.
                  Error: The backup GPT table is not at the end of the disk, as it should be.  This might mean that another operating system believes the
                   disk is smaller.  Fix, by moving the backup to the end (and removing the old backup)?

                  The GPT partition table information is stored at the start of the disk. To reduce the risk of damage, a backup of the information is saved at the end of the disk. When you expand the disk capacity, the end of the disk changes accordingly. In this case, enter Fix to move the backup file of the information to new disk end.

                • If the following warning information is displayed, enter Fix.
                  Warning: Not all of the space available to /dev/vdb appears to be used, you can fix the GPT to use all of the space (an extra 104857600
                  diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0036.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0036.html
                  index 8fa877d8..b9f96fd9 100644
                  --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0036.html
                  +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0036.html
                  @@ -1,23 +1,41 @@
                   
                   
                   

                  Attaching a Non-Shared Disk

                  -

                  Scenarios

                  Independently created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this case, you need to attach the data disks to servers for use.

                  -
                  A system disk must be created during a server creation and is automatically attached. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as System disk, and the status is displayed as In-use. After a system disk is detached from a server, the disk function changes to Bootable disk, and the status changes to Available.

                  Bootable disks are the system disks detached from servers. A bootable disk can be re-attached to a server and be used as a system disk or data disk depending on the device name selected.

                  +

                  Scenarios

                  Separately created EVS disks are data disks. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as Data disk, and the status is displayed as Available. In this case, you need to attach the data disks to servers for use.

                  +
                  A system disk must be created together with an ECS and is automatically attached. In the disk list, the function of such disks is displayed as System disk, and the status is displayed as In-use. After a system disk is detached from an ECS, the disk function changes to Bootable disk, and the status changes to Available.

                  Bootable disks are the system disks detached from servers. A bootable disk can be re-attached to a server and be used as a system disk or data disk depending on the disk function selected. For details, see Attaching an Existing System Disk.

                  -

                  This section describes how to attach a non-shared disk. A non-shared disk can be attached to one server only.

                  +

                  This section describes how to attach a non-shared disk.

                  -

                  Constraints

                  Cloud servers created from ISO images are only used for OS installation. They have limited functions and cannot have EVS disks attached.

                  +

                  Prerequisites

                  • The non-shared disk status is Available.
                  +
                  +

                  Constraints

                  • Cloud servers created from ISO images are only used for OS installation. They have limited functions and cannot have EVS disks attached.
                  • A non-shared disk can be attached to one server only.
                  • The disk and the server must be in the same region and AZ.
                  • A shared disk can be attached only when the servers' statuses are Running or Stopped.
                  • A frozen disk cannot be attached.

                  Attaching the Disk on the EVS Console

                  1. Log in to the management console.
                  2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
                  3. Under Storage, click Elastic Volume Service.

                    The disk list page is displayed.

                    -

                  4. Locate the target disk in the list and click Attach.

                    The Attach Disk dialog box is displayed.
                    Figure 1 Attach Disk dialog box
                    +

                  5. Locate the target disk in the list and click Attach.

                    The Attach Disk dialog box is displayed.
                    Figure 1 Attach Disk dialog box
                    -

                  6. Select the server and then select a device name from the drop-down list. Ensure that the disk and server are in the same AZ.
                  7. Click OK to return to the disk list page. The status of the disk is Attaching, indicating that the disk is being attached to the server. When the disk status changes to In-use, the disk is successfully attached.
                  8. Initialize the disk.

                    After the disk has been attached to a server, the disk can be used only after you have initialized it. For details, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

                    +

                  9. Select the server and then select the disk function from the drop-down list. Ensure that the disk and server are in the same AZ.

                    One device name can be used for one disk only. For how to obtain the disk name in the OS, see section "How Do I Obtain My Disk Name in the ECS OS Using the Device Identifier Provided on the Console?" in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.

                    +

                  10. Click OK to return to the disk list page.

                    The status of the disk is Attaching, indicating that the disk is being attached to the server. When the disk status changes to In-use, the disk is successfully attached.

                    +

                  11. Initialize the disk.

                    After the disk has been attached to a server, the disk can be used only after you have initialized it. For details, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

                  +

                  Attaching the Disk on the ECS Console

                  1. Log in to the management console.
                  2. Click in the upper left corner and select your region and project.
                  3. Under Computing, choose Elastic Cloud Server.
                  4. In the search box above the upper right corner of the ECS list, enter the ECS name, IP address, or ID for search.
                  5. Click the name of the target ECS.

                    The page providing details about the ECS is displayed.

                    +
                  6. Click the Disks tab. Then, click Attach Disk.

                    The Attach Disk dialog box is displayed.

                    +
                    Figure 2 Attach Disk
                    +
                  7. Select the target disk and specify it as the system disk or a data disk.
                    • If no disks are available, click Create Disk in the lower part of the list.
                    • For the restrictions on attaching disks, see FAQ "What Are the Requirements for Attaching an EVS Disk to an ECS?" in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
                    • The device names for the local disks and EVS disks attached to a disk-intensive ECS comply with the following rules:
                      • System disk: sda or vda
                      • Local disk: the device name following sda or vda in alphabetical order
                      • EVS disk: the device name in alphabetical order following those used by local disks
                      +
                    +
                    +
                  8. Click OK.

                    After the disk is attached, you can view the information about it on the Disks tab.

                    +
                    Figure 3 Viewing the newly attached disk
                    +
                  +

                  Follow-Up Operations

                  If you are attaching a new disk, you must then log in to the server and initialize the disk before it can be used. To learn how to initialize disks, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

                  +

                  Related Operations

                  If your disk cannot be attached to a server, see Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?.

                  +

                  If the disk you are going to attach contains data, see Attaching an Existing Disk.

                  +

                  If the attached data disk is not showing up, see Why Can't I View the Attached Data Disk on the Server?.

                  +
                • Select the target servers you want to attach the shared disk. Ensure that the disk and servers are in the same AZ. After you select the servers, Data disk is automatically entered as the disk function for each server.

                  +

                • Click OK to return to the disk list page.

                  The status of the disk is Attaching, indicating that the disk is being attached to the servers. When the disk status changes to In-use, the disk is successfully attached.

                  +

            +
          +

          Attaching the Disk on the ECS Console

          1. Log in to the management console.
          2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
          3. Under Compute, click Elastic Cloud Server.
          4. In the search box above the upper right corner of the ECS list, enter the ECS name, IP address, or ID for search.
          5. Click the name of the target ECS.

            The page providing details about the ECS is displayed.

            +
          6. Click the Disks tab. Then, click Attach Disk.

            The Attach Disk page is displayed.

            +
          7. Select the target disk and specify it as the system disk or a data disk.
            • For Xen ECSs, you can specify a specific device name, such as /dev/sdb.
            • For KVM ECSs, you can specify the disk as the system disk or a data disk but cannot specify a specific device name.
            +
            • If no disks are available, click Create Disk in the lower part of the list.
            • For the restrictions on attaching disks, see FAQ "What Are the Requirements for Attaching an EVS Disk to an ECS?" in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
            • The device names for the local disks and EVS disks attached to a disk-intensive ECS comply with the following rules:
              • System disk: sda or vda
              • Local disk: the device name following sda or vda in alphabetical order
              • EVS disk: the device name in alphabetical order following those used by local disks
              +

              Example:

              +

              A D1 ECS has two local disks. The device names of the two local disks are sdb and sdc (or vdb and vdc), and the device names of the EVS disks are sdd, sde, ... (or vdd, vde, ...).

              +
            +
            +
          8. Click OK.

            After the disk is attached, you can view the information about it on the Disks tab.

            +

          Follow-Up Operations

          If you are attaching a new disk, you must then log in to the server and initialize the disk before it can be used. To learn how to initialize disks, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

          +

          Related Operations

          If your disk cannot be attached to a server, see Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?.

          +

          If the disk you are going to attach contains data, see Attaching an Existing Disk.

          +

          If the attached data disk is not showing up, see Why Can't I View the Attached Data Disk on the Server?.

          +

Delete tags that are no longer needed for existing disks.

Searching Disks by Tags

+

Searching for Disks by Tag

After tags are added, search for disks by tags.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 EVS concepts

Concept

+

Description

+

IOPS

+

Number of read/write operations performed by an EVS disk per second

+

Throughput

+

Amount of data read from and written into an EVS disk per second

+

Read/write I/O latency

+

Minimum interval between two consecutive read/write operations of an EVS disk

+

Burst capability

+

The burst capability allows the IOPS of a small-capacity disk to reach the disk IOPS burst limit, which can surpass the disk IOPS limit within a certain period of time.

+

VBD

+

A device type of EVS disks. VBD EVS disks only support basic SCSI read/write commands.

+

SCSI

+

A device type of EVS disks. SCSI EVS disks support transparent SCSI command transmission and allow the server OS to directly access the underlying storage media.

+
+
+
+
+ +
+ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0106.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0106.html index 6e2d1cac..c9711f6a 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0106.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0106.html @@ -1,9 +1,70 @@

EVS and Other Services

-
Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.
Figure 1 Relationships between EVS and other services
+
Figure 1 shows the relationships between EVS and other services.
Figure 1 Relationships between EVS and other services
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 EVS and other services

Interactive Function

+

Related Service

+

Reference

+

EVS disks can be attached to ECSs and used as scalable block storage devices.

+

ECS

+
+

+

SCSI EVS disks can be attached to BMSs and used as scalable block storage devices.

+

BMS

+
+

Backups can be created for EVS disks to guarantee the reliability and security of the server data.

+

CBR

+
+

EVS encryption feature relies on KMS. You can use the keys provided by KMS to encrypt EVS disks (both system and data disks), thus improving EVS disk data security.

+

KMS

+
+

After EVS is enabled, the performance metrics of monitored disks can be viewed through Cloud Eye without installing any additional plug-in. The monitored metrics include Disk Read Rate, Disk Write Rate, Disk Read Requests, and Disk Write Requests.

+

Cloud Eye

+

Viewing EVS Monitoring Data

+

Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations of EVS resources, facilitating user query, audit, and backtracking.

+

CTS

+

Auditing EVS Operation Records

+

Tag Management Service (TMS) tags are used to identify EVS resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.

+

TMS

+

Adding a Tag

+
-
  • ECS: EVS disks can be attached to ECSs and used as scalable block storage devices.
  • BMS: SCSI EVS disks can be attached to BMSs and used as scalable block storage devices.
  • CBR: The CBR service allows you to back up EVS disk data to ensure the reliability and security of the server data.
  • KMS: EVS disk encryption depends on the KMS service. You can use the keys provided by KMS to encrypt EVS disks (both system and data disks), thus improving EVS disk data security.
  • Cloud Eye: After using EVS, you can view EVS performance metrics through Cloud Eye without installing any additional plug-in. The monitored metrics include Disk Read Rate, Disk Write Rate, Disk Read Requests, and Disk Write Requests.
  • Cloud Trace Service (CTS): CTS records operations of EVS resources, facilitating user query, audit, and backtracking.
  • Tag Management Service (TMS): Tags are used to identify the EVS resources for purposes of easy categorization and quick search.

-

Setting Automatic Mounting at System Start

Modify the fstab file to set automatic disk mounting at server start. You can also set automatic mounting for the servers containing data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

-

The following procedure shows how to set automatic disk mounting at server start by using UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names to identify disks in the file because a device name may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) during the server stop or start, resulting in improper server running after restart.

-

UUID is the unique character string for disk partitions in a Linux system.

+

Configuring Automatic Mounting at System Start

The fstab file controls what disks are automatically mounted at server startup. You can configure the fstab file of a server that has data. This operation will not affect the existing data.

+

The following example uses UUIDs to identify disks in the fstab file. You are advised not to use device names (like /dev/vdb1) to identify disks in the file because device names are assigned dynamically and may change (for example, from /dev/vdb1 to /dev/vdb2) after a server stop or start. This can even prevent your server from booting up.

+

UUIDs are the unique character strings for identifying partitions in Linux.

-
  1. Run the following command to query the partition UUID:

    blkid Disk partition

    -

    In this example, run the following command to query the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition:

    -

    blkid /dev/vdb1

    -

    Information similar to the following is displayed:

    -
    [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
    +
    1. Query the partition UUID.

      blkid Disk partition

      +

      In this example, the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is queried.

      +

      blkid /dev/vdb1

      +

      Information similar to the following is displayed:

      +
      [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
       /dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"
      -

      The UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is displayed.

      -

    2. Run the following command to open the fstab file using the vi editor:

      vi /etc/fstab

      -

    3. Press i to enter editing mode.
    4. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

      UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
      -

    5. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

      The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

      -

    6. Perform the following operations to verify the automatic mounting function:

      1. Run the following command to unmount the partition:

        umount Disk partition

        -

        In this example, run the following command:

        -

        umount /dev/vdb1

        -
      2. Run the following command to reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file:

        mount -a

        -
      3. Run the following command to query the file system mounting information:

        mount | grep Mount point

        -

        In this example, run the following command:

        -

        mount | grep /mnt/sdc

        -

        If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

        -
        root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
        +

        Carefully record the UUID, as you will need it for the following step.

        +

      4. Open the fstab file using the vi editor.

        vi /etc/fstab

        +

      5. Press i to enter editing mode.
      6. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:

        UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
        +

      7. Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

        The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

        +

      8. Verify that the disk is auto-mounted at startup.

        1. Unmount the partition.

          umount Disk partition

          +

          In this example, run the following command:

          +

          umount /dev/vdb1

          +
        2. Reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file.

          mount -a

          +
        3. Query the file system mounting information.

          mount | grep Mount point

          +

          In this example, run the following command:

          +

          mount | grep /mnt/sdc

          +

          If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

          +
          root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
           /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc type ext4 (rw,relatime,data=ordered)

      diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0110.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0110.html index 5e34610e..175ef64d 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0110.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0110.html @@ -1,21 +1,22 @@

      Managing EVS Backups

      -

      Scenarios

      EVS backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

      +

      Scenarios

      EVS disk backups are created using the CBR service. For details, see Creating a Cloud Disk Backup in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

      -

      This section describes how to configure a backup policy for disks. With backup policies configured, data on EVS disks can be periodically backed up to improve data security.

      +

      You can configure a backup policy for disks. With backup policies configured, data on EVS disks can be periodically backed up to improve data security.

      -

      a Disk Backup Vault and Configuring a Backup Policy

      1. Log in to the CBR console.

        1. Log in to the management console.
        2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
        3. Choose Storage > Cloud Backup and Recovery > Cloud Disk Backups.
        -

      2. In the upper right corner, click Create Disk Backup Vault.
      3. (Optional) In the disk list, select the disks you want to back up. After disks are selected, they are added to the list of selected disks.

        Figure 1 Selecting disks
        -
        • Only Available and In-use disks can be selected.
        • You can associate desired disks with the vault you created later if you skip this step.
        +

        Constraints

        • Backups can be created only when the disks are in the Available or In-use state.
        • Only users with the CBR FullAccess permissions can use the cloud disk backup function. If the user does not have the permissions, contact the account administrator to grant the permissions first.
        +
        +

        a Disk Backup Vault and Applying a Backup Policy

        1. Log in to the CBR console.

          1. Log in to the management console.
          2. Click in the upper left corner and select the desired region and project.
          3. Choose Storage > Cloud Backup and Recovery > Cloud Disk Backups.
          +

        2. In the upper right corner, click Create Disk Backup Vault.
        3. (Optional) In the disk list, select the disks you want to back up. After disks are selected, they are added to the list of selected disks. See Figure 1.

          Figure 1 Selecting disks
          +
          • Only Available and In-use disks can be selected.
          • You can also associate disks with the vault you are creating later if you skip this step.
          -

        4. Specify the vault capacity. This capacity indicates the total size of the disks that you want to associate with this vault. Therefore, specify a vault capacity that is greater than or equal to the total size of the disks you want to back up. The value ranges from the total size of the disks to 10,485,760 in the unit of GiB.
        5. Determine whether to configure auto backup.

          • If you select Configure, you must then select an existing backup policy or create a new one. After the vault is created, the system applies this backup policy to the vault, and all disks associated with this vault will be automatically backed up based on this policy.
          • If you select Skip, disks associated with this vault are not automatically backed up.
          +

        6. Specify a vault capacity ranging from the total sizes of disks to 10,485,760 GiB.
        7. Configure auto backup.

          • If you select Configure, you must then select an existing backup policy or create a new one. After the vault is created, the system applies this backup policy to the vault, and all disks associated with this vault will be automatically backed up based on this policy.
          • If you select Skip, disks associated with this vault are not automatically backed up.

        8. Specify a name for the vault.

          The name can contain 1 to 64 characters including digits, letters, underscores (_), and hyphens (-), for example, vault-612c.

          You can use the default name, which is in the format of vault_xxxx.

          -

        9. Click Next.
        10. Complete the creation as prompted.
        11. Go back to the disk backup page. The vault you created is displayed in the list.

          You can associate disks to the new vault or create backups for the disks. For details, see Vault Management in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

          +

        12. Click Next.
        13. Complete the creation as prompted.
        14. Go back to the disk backup page. The vault you created is displayed in the list.

          You can associate disks to the new vault or create backups for the disks. For details, see section "Vault Management" in the Cloud Backup and Recovery User Guide.

        -
        diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0111.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0111.html index ba005652..680fdba9 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0111.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_0111.html @@ -10,6 +10,8 @@
      4. +

2023-01-16

+

2024-04-19

+

Updated the following content:

+

Deleted the content related to Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized) and High I/O (Performance optimized I) EVS disks.

+

2024-02-18

+

Updated the following content:

+
  • Added the content describing the relationship between disk performance and data block size, added the description that Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized) and High I/O (Performance optimized I) disks can no longer be created, and modified the IOPS burst limit of an Ultra-high I/O disk to 10,000 in section Disk Types and Performance.
  • Added the description of the maximum sizes that a system disk and a data disk can be expanded to in section Expansion Overview.
  • Added the notes that Ultra-high I/O (Latency optimized) and High I/O (Performance optimized I) disks can no longer be created in sections Constraints and Create an EVS Disk.
+

2023-12-13

+

Updated the following content:

+

Added descriptions of the General Purpose SSD disk type in sections Disk Types and Performance, Constraints, and Create an EVS Disk.

+

2023-11-01

+

Updated the following content:

+

Updated or added certain permission restrictions in sections EVS Encryption, EVS Backup, Managing Encrypted EVS Disks, and Managing Shared EVS Disks.

+

2023-07-14

+

Updated the following content:

+

Added the formula used to calculate the disk throughput in Disk Types and Performance.

+

2023-06-12

+

This issue incorporates the following change:

+

Added screenshots in sections Create an EVS Disk, Attaching a Non-Shared Disk, Attaching a Shared Disk, Attaching an Existing System Disk, Attaching an Existing Non-Shared Disk, Viewing EVS Disk Details, Managing EVS Backups, Creating a Snapshot, How Can I View My Disk Details?, Can I Change the Disk Type, Device Type, or Sharing Attribute of My Disk?, Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?, and How Can I Handle a Slowdown in Disk Read/Write Speed or Increased I/Os?.

+

2023-03-13

+

This issue incorporates the following changes:

+

Modified the following content:

+

Document content has been supplemented in sections What Is EVS?, Disk Types and Performance, EVS Encryption, EVS Backup, EVS Snapshot, Permissions, Process Overview, Create an EVS Disk, Attaching a Non-Shared Disk, Attaching a Shared Disk, Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles, Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2008), Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2019), Initializing a Linux Data Disk (fdisk), Initializing a Linux Data Disk (parted), Expansion Overview, Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk, Expanding Capacity for an Available EVS Disk, Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2008), Partition and File System Extension Preparations (Linux), Extending Partitions and File Systems for System Disks (Linux), Detaching a Data Disk, Deleting EVS Disks, Managing EVS Backups, Snapshot Overview, Creating a Snapshot, Deleting a Snapshot, Rolling Back Data from a Snapshot, Creating an EVS Disk from a Snapshot, How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?, Will My Disk Data Be Lost After I Expand the Disk Capacity?, Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?, Can I Attach a Disk to a Server in Another AZ?, How Can I Attach a Shared Disk to Multiple Servers?, and EVS Disk Status.

+

Added the following content:

+

Added sections EVS Three-Copy Redundancy, Constraints, EVS Concepts, Initializing a Windows Data Disk (Windows Server 2008), Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows Server 2016), Attaching an Existing Disk, Viewing EVS Disk Details, Viewing Details of a Snapshot, How Do I Change the Name of My Disk?, Manage EVS Quotas, Summary, Can I Change the Disk Type, Device Type, or Sharing Attribute of My Disk?, How Can I Migrate Data from an EVS Disk?, What Does the "reserveVolume" Trace Mean in CTS?, How Can I Upload Files to My EVS Disk?, Can I Use Backups or Snapshots Created Before Capacity Expansion to Restore Data on Expanded Disks?, How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to a New Partition?, How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to an Existing Partition?, Why Can't I Expand Capacity for My Disk?, How Do I Extend the Root Partition of a Quickly Provisioned BMS?, Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?, Can I Change the Function of a System Disk or Data Disk Created Along with a Server?, How Do I Obtain My Disk Device Name in the ECS OS Using the Device Identifier Provided on the Console?, Deletion, What Can I Do If the Capacity of My Disk Reaches the Maximum But I Still Need More Space?, Can I Transfer the Data Disk Capacity to a System Disk?, Performance, Snapshot, and Backup.

+

2023-02-20

+

Modified the following content:

+

Added "Disk IOPS Calculation Formula" and "Disk Burst Capability and Principles" in Disk Types and Performance.

+

2023-01-16

Modified the following content:

- +

2022-12-15

Added the following content:

-
  • Added the EVS operations that can be recorded in Auditing.
  • Added some FAQs.
  • Optimized certain descriptions.
+

2022-07-15

@@ -29,7 +80,7 @@

2022-04-15

Added the following content:

- +

2021-12-27

@@ -86,7 +137,7 @@

2018-01-31

Added the following content:

-
  • Added Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server.
+
  • Added Configuring a Virtual IP Address for the Server.

2018-01-25

@@ -128,13 +179,13 @@

2017-10-20

Modified the following content:

-
  • Changed the maximum capacity of a system disk to 1,024 GB in Create an EVS Disk.
  • Added the description that a maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for an EVS disk in Creating a Snapshot.
+
  • Changed the maximum capacity of a system disk to 1,024 GiB in Create an EVS Disk.
  • Added the description that a maximum of 7 snapshots can be created for an EVS disk in Creating a Snapshot.

2017-10-13

Added the following content:

-
  • Enabled the function of rolling back data from snapshots and added the relevant content in the document.
  • Added the content of searching EVS resources by tags in Searching Disks by Tags.
+
  • Enabled the function of rolling back data from snapshots and added the relevant content in the document.
  • Added the content of searching EVS resources by tags in Searching for Disks by Tag.

Modified the following content:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 Method of creation

Disk

+

Description

+

Method

+

System disk

+

System disks are created along with servers and cannot be created separately.

+
  • See section "Creating an ECS" in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
  • See section "Creating a BMS" in the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
+

Data disk

+

Data disks can be created along with servers or separately.

+
  • See section "Creating an ECS" in the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.
  • See section "Creating a BMS" in the Bare Metal Server User Guide.
  • Create an EVS Disk
+
+
+
+

Figure 2 shows how to purchase a data disk separately.

+
Figure 2 Process overview
+
  1. Preparations: Register an account on the console and obtain the permissions required to create servers and disks.
  2. Create a disk. Configure the disk parameters, including the disk type, size, name, and other information. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.
  3. Attach the data disk. Attach the separately created disk to a server. For details, see the following sections: +
  4. Initialize the data disk. Log in to the server and initialize the data disk before using it. For details about how to initialize the disk, see the following sections: +
+
+

+
+ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_2704.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_2704.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d86b0389 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_01_2704.html @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ + + + +

Managing EVS Monitoring Data

+ +

+
+ +
+ +
+ diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0001.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0001.html index 9b081a55..c17a6973 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0001.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0001.html @@ -4,18 +4,28 @@
diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0012.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0012.html index fca72b3d..006dda47 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0012.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0012.html @@ -2,9 +2,9 @@

If I Detach a Disk, Will I Lose the Data on My Disk?

It depends on if the disk is encrypted or not.

-
  • Encrypted
    • CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.

      Before you detach an EVS disk encrypted by a CMK, check whether the CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion. If the CMK is unavailable, the disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee how long it will be usable. If the disk is detached, it will not be possible to re-attach it later. In this case, do not detach the disk without a working CMK.

      +
      • Encrypted
        • The CMK is disabled or scheduled for deletion.

          The disk can still be used, but there is no guarantee for how long it will be usable. If the disk is detached, it will be impossible to re-attach it later. In this case, do not detach the disk without a working CMK.

          The restoration method varies depending on the CMK status. For details, see EVS Encryption.

          -
        • CMK is available.

          If the CMK is available, the disk can be detached and re-attached, and data on the disk will not be lost.

          +
        • The CMK is available.

          The disk can be detached and re-attached, and data on the disk will not be lost.

          To ensure your data safety, you are advised to follow the instructions described in Disk Detachment Process.

      • Non-encrypted

        Data on a disk will not be lost after the disk is detached, and the disk can be re-attached later if needed.

        diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0014.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0014.html index 82b1d09b..d679a253 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0014.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0014.html @@ -12,31 +12,26 @@

        Error

        Delete the disk in the Error state and create another one.

        -

        The disk will no longer be charged after an error has occurred.

        Deletion failed

        Contact customer service.

        -

        The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Deletion failed.

        Expansion failed

        Our customer service personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the customer service personnel contact you. If the issue is urgent, you can contact our customer service personnel directly.

        -

        The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Expansion failed.

        Restoration failed

        Our customer service personnel will contact you and help you handle this error. Do not perform any operations on the disk before the customer service personnel contact you. If the issue is urgent, you can contact our customer service personnel directly.

        -

        The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Restoration failed.

        Rollback failed

        You can roll back the snapshot data to the disk again.

        -

        The disk will no longer be charged after its status changes to Rollback failed.

        diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0019.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0019.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38ef227e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0019.html @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + +

        How Can I Test My Disk Performance?

        +

        Precautions

        In the disk performance test, if the start sector number is not 4-KiB aligned, the disk performance will be greatly affected. Ensure that the start sector number is 4-KiB aligned before you start the test.

        +
        To test the performance of a shared disk, the following requirements must be met:
        • The shared disk must be attached to multiple servers (ECSs or BMSs).
        • If the shared disk is attached to multiple ECSs, these ECSs must belong to the same anti-affinity ECS group.

          If these ECSs fail to meet the anti-affinity requirement, the shared disk cannot reach the optimal performance.

          +
        +
        +
        +
        +

        The testing process for Windows and Linux is different.

        + +

        Windows

        The way you test disk performance depends on the server OS. This section uses Windows Server 2019 Standard 64-bit as an example. For other Windows OSs, see the corresponding OS documentations.

        +

        Install the performance measurement tool Iometer before the test. You can obtain the tool at http://www.iometer.org/.

        +
        1. Log in to the server.
        2. Press win+R to open the Run window. Enter msinfo32 and click OK.

          The system information window is displayed.

          +

        3. Choose components > storage > disks. In the right pane, view the partition offset.

          • If 4096 can be divided by the parameter value, the partition is 4-KiB aligned. Go to 4.
          • If 4096 cannot be divided by the parameter value, the partition is not 4-KiB aligned. Ensure 4-KiB alignment for the partition before continuing the test.

            If you delete the partition and select another start sector number for 4-KiB alignment, you will lose all the data on that partition. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

            +
            +
          +

        4. Use Iometer to test the disk performance. For details, see the Iometer product documentation.

          When the disk IOPS and throughput are tested, the parameter settings for Iometer and fio are the same. For details, see Table 1.

          +

          The following example uses Iometer to test the disk performance.

          +
          1. Set the workflow.

            +
          2. Set the test run time.

            In this example, the test run time is set to 10 minutes, with 60 seconds ramp up time. Disk performance is tested after the writes are stable.

            +

            +
          3. Set the data block size and read/write policy. In this example, the disk size is set to 64 KiB, the policy is 100% sequential write.

            +
          4. View the test results.

            +
          +

        +
        +

        Linux

        If you use an old version Linux OS, for example CentOS 6.5, and run fdisk to create partitions, the default start sector number will not be 4-KiB aligned, which will greatly affect the test performance. For this reason, if such an OS is used, you are advised to select a new start sector number, one that is 4-KiB aligned, when creating partitions.

        +

        The way you test disk performance depends on the server OS. This section uses CentOS 7.2 64-bit as an example. For other Linux OSs, see the corresponding OS documentations.

        +

        Install the performance measurement tool, fio, before the test.

        +
        1. Log in to the server and switch to user root.
        2. Before you start the test, run the following command to check whether the start sector number is 4-KiB aligned:

          fdisk -lu

          +
          Information similar to the following is displayed:
          [root@ecs-centos sdc]# fdisk -lu
          +
          +Disk /dev/xvda: 10.7 GiB, 10737418240 bytes, 20971520 sectors
          +Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
          +Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +Disk label type: dos
          +Disk identifier: 0x7db77aa5
          +
          +   Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
          +/dev/xvda1   *        2048    20968919    10483436   83  Linux
          +
          +Disk /dev/xvdb: 10.7 GiB, 10737418240 bytes, 20971520 sectors
          +Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
          +Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +
          +
          +Disk /dev/xvdc: 53.7 GiB, 53687091200 bytes, 104857600 sectors
          +Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
          +Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
          +Disk label type: dos
          +Disk identifier: 0x3cf3265c
          +
          +   Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
          +/dev/xvdc1            2048    41943039    20970496   83  Linux
          +
          +
          • If 8 can be divided by the start sector number, the number is 4-KiB aligned. Go to 3.
          • If 8 cannot be divided by the start sector number, the number is not 4-KiB aligned. Delete the partition and select a 4-KiB aligned start sector number for the new partition before continuing the test.

            If you delete the partition and select another start sector number for 4-KiB alignment, you will lose all the data on that partition. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

            +
            +
          +

        3. Run the following commands and use fio to test the disk performance:

          • To test random write IOPS, run the following command: fio -direct=1 -iodepth=128 -rw=randwrite -ioengine=libaio -bs=4k -size=10G -numjobs=1 -runtime=600 -group_reporting -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt -name=Rand_Write_IOPS_Test
          • To test random read IOPS, run the following command: fio -direct=1 -iodepth=128 -rw=randread -ioengine=libaio -bs=4k -size=10G -numjobs=1 -runtime=600 -group_reporting -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt -name=Rand_Read_IOPS_Test
          • To test write throughput, run the following command: fio -direct=1 -iodepth=32 -rw=write -ioengine=libaio -bs=1024k -size=10G -numjobs=1 -runtime=600 -group_reporting -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt -name=Write_BandWidth_Test
          • To test read throughput, run the following command: fio -direct=1 -iodepth=32 -rw=read -ioengine=libaio -bs=1024k -size=10G -numjobs=1 -runtime=600 -group_reporting -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt -name=Read_BandWidth_Test
          • To test random read latency, run the following command: fio -direct=1 -iodepth=1 -rw=randread -ioengine=libaio -bs=4k -size=10G -numjobs=1 -runtime=60 -group_reporting -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt -name=Rand_Read_LATE_Test
            • When using fio to perform a raw disk performance test, ensure that no partitions and file systems have been created on the disk and there is no data stored on the disk. Or, the raw disk test will damage the file system, and data on the disk will become read-only. In this case, your only option will be to delete the disk and buy a new one to continue the test.
            • Do not perform the test on a disk with service data on it. If such test is a must, you are advised to perform the test as follows:
              • Back up the disk data before the test as you may damage the data on the disk.
              • Specify a file, for example -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt, to test the performance of the file system.
              +
            +
            +

            Table 1 lists the fio test parameters.

            + +
            + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
            Table 1 Parameter description

            Parameter

            +

            Description

            +

            direct

            +

            Defines whether direct I/O is used.

            +
            • Set to 0: buffered I/O is used.
            • Set to 1: direct I/O is used.
            +

            iodepth

            +

            Defines the I/O queue depth.

            +

            This queue depth refers to the queue depth of each thread regardless of whether a single or multiple threads are used in the test. Total concurrent I/Os of fio = iodepth x numjobs Examples:

            +
            • If there is a single thread and -iodepth=32, the I/O queue depth of this thread is 32 and the total concurrent I/Os of fio is 32 (32 x 1).
            • If there are three threads and -iodepth=32, the I/O queue depth of each thread is 32 and the total concurrent I/Os of fio is 96 (32 x 3).
            +

            rw

            +

            Defines the test read/write policy.

            +
            • randread: random read
            • randwrite: random write
            • read: sequential read
            • write: sequential write
            • randrw: mixed random read/write
            +

            ioengine

            +

            Defines how fio delivers the I/O request (synchronously or asynchronously).

            +
            • Synchronous I/O: Only one I/O request is delivered at a time, and the response is returned after the kernel has processed the request. That said, the single-thread I/O queue depth is always less than 1, and multi-thread concurrent processing can be used to handle such issues. Normally, 16 to 32 concurrent working threads fully occupy the I/O queue depth.
            • Asynchronous I/O: Multiple I/O requests are delivered using libaio at a time. Wait for the process to complete and reduce the interaction times to improve efficiency.
            +

            bs

            +

            Defines the I/O block size. The unit can be KiB, Kb, MiB, and Mb, and the default value is 4 KiB.

            +

            size

            +

            Defines the amount of data processed by the test I/Os. If parameters, such as runtime, are not specified, the test ends when fio has processed all the specified data amount.

            +

            The value can be a number with a unit or percentage. A number with a unit indicates the read/write data amount, for example size=10G, indicating a 10-GiB read/write data amount. A percentage indicates the ratio of read/write data amount to the total size of files, for example size=20%, indicating the read/write data amount takes 20% of the total file space.

            +

            numjobs

            +

            Defines the number of concurrent threads.

            +

            runtime

            +

            Defines the test time.

            +

            If this parameter is not specified, the test ends until the specified data amount is processed by the block size defined using parameter size.

            +

            group_reporting

            +

            Defines the test result display mode. The parameter value displays the statistics on a single thread instead of that on all jobs.

            +

            filename

            +

            Defines the name of the test file or device.

            +
            • If a file is specified, the performance of the file system is tested. Example: -filename=/opt/fiotest/fiotest.txt
            • If a device name is specified, the performance of the raw disk is tested. Example: -filename=/dev/vdb
              NOTICE:

              If the test is performed on a disk already has partitions and file systems created as well as data on it, user parameter filename to specify a file so that the original file system is not damaged and the data is not overwritten.

              +
              +
            +

            name

            +

            Defines the test task name.

            +
            +
            +
          +

        +
        +
        +
        + +
        + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0022.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0022.html index 95c8e6f3..a3b9d04c 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0022.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0022.html @@ -43,34 +43,34 @@ tmpfs tmpfs 398M 0 398M 0% /run/user/0

        Unlike the normal command output, only system disk /dev/vda1 is visible, but data disk /dev/vdb1 is missing from the command output.

        Cause Analysis:

        • Cause 1: New data disks are not formatted and partitioned by default, and an unformatted disk will not be listed in the command output. You must manually initialize the disk.

          For details, see Introduction to Data Disk Initialization Scenarios and Partition Styles.

          -
        • Cause 2: If a data disk cannot be found after the server is restarted, automatic partition mounting at system start may not be configured. Perform the following steps:
          1. Run the following command to mount the partition again:

            mount Disk partition Mount point

            +
          2. Cause 2: If a data disk cannot be found after the server is restarted, automatic partition mounting at system start may not be configured. Perform the following steps:
            1. Mount the data disk.

              mount Disk partition Mount point

              In this example, run the following command:

              mount /dev/vdb1 /mnt/sdc

              -

              Perform the following steps to enable automatic partition mounting at system start:

              -
            2. Run the following command to query the partition UUID:

              blkid Disk partition

              -

              In this example, run the following command to query the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition:

              +

              Perform the following steps to configure auto mount at system start:

              +
            3. Query the partition UUID.

              blkid Disk partition

              +

              In this example, the UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is queried.

              blkid /dev/vdb1

              Information similar to the following is displayed:

              [root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# blkid /dev/vdb1
               /dev/vdb1: UUID="0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df" TYPE="ext4"

              The UUID of the /dev/vdb1 partition is displayed.

              -
            4. Run the following command to open the fstab file using the vi editor:

              vi /etc/fstab

              +
            5. Open the fstab file using the vi editor.

              vi /etc/fstab

              Press i to enter editing mode.

            6. Move the cursor to the end of the file and press Enter. Then, add the following information:
              UUID=0b3040e2-1367-4abb-841d-ddb0b92693df /mnt/sdc                ext4    defaults        0 2
              -
              The preceding content is used for reference only. Add the information that is used in the environment. The parameters are described as follows:
              • The first column indicates the partition UUID obtained in 2.
              • The second column indicates the directory on which the partition is mounted. You can query the mount point using the df -TH command.
              • The third column indicates the file system format of the partition. You can query the file system format using the df -TH command.
              • The fourth column indicates the partition mount option. Normally, this parameter is set to defaults.
              • The fifth column indicates the Linux dump backup option.
                • 0: Linux dump backup is not used. Normally, dump backup is not used, and you can set this parameter to 0.
                • 1: Linux dump backup is used.
                -
              • The sixth column indicates the fsck option, that is, whether to use fsck to check the attached disk during startup.
                • 0: not use fsck.
                • If the mount point is the root partition (/), this parameter must be set to 1.

                  When this parameter is set to 1 for the root partition, this parameter for other partitions must start with 2 because the system checks the partitions in the ascending order of the values.

                  +
                  In this example, the line starting with "UUID" is the information added. Edit this line to match the following format:
                  • UUID: The UUID obtained in 2.
                  • Mount point: The directory on which the partition is mounted. You can query the mount point using df -TH.
                  • Filesystem: The file system format of the partition. You can query the file system format using df -TH.
                  • Mount option: The partition mount option. Usually, this parameter is set to defaults.
                  • Dump: The Linux dump backup option.
                    • 0: Linux dump backup is not used. Usually, dump backup is not used, and you can set this parameter to 0.
                    • 1: Linux dump backup is used.
                    +
                  • fsck: The fsck option, which means whether to use fsck to check the disk during startup.
                    • 0: The fsck option is not used.
                    • If the mount point is the root partition (/), this parameter must be set to 1.

                      If this parameter is set to 1 for the root partition, this parameter for other partitions must start with 2 because the system checks the partitions in the ascending order of the values.

                • Press Esc, enter :wq, and press Enter.

                  The system saves the configurations and exits the vi editor.

                  -
                  Perform the following operations to verify the automatic mounting function:
                  1. Run the following command to unmount the partition:

                    umount Disk partition

                    +
                    Verify that the disk is auto-mounted at startup.
                    1. Unmount the partition.

                      umount Disk partition

                      In this example, run the following command:

                      umount /dev/vdb1

                      -
                    2. Run the following command to reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file:

                      mount -a

                      -
                    3. Run the following command to query the file system mounting information:

                      mount | grep Mount point

                      +
                    4. Reload all the content in the /etc/fstab file.

                      mount -a

                      +
                    5. Query the file system mounting information.

                      mount | grep Mount point

                      In this example, run the following command:

                      mount | grep /mnt/sdc

                      -

                      If information similar to the following is displayed, automatic mounting has been configured:

                      +

                      If information similar to the following is displayed, auto mount has taken effect:

                      root@ecs-test-0001 ~]# mount | grep /mnt/sdc
                       /dev/vdb1 on /mnt/sdc type ext4 (rw,relatime,data=ordered)
                    diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0023.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0023.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40e35c17 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0023.html @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + + +

                    Can I Use Backups or Snapshots Created Before Capacity Expansion to Restore Data on Expanded Disks?

                    +

                    Yes. If backups or snapshots have been created for disks before capacity was expanded, you can restore your disk data from these backups or snapshots after the capacity is expanded. Expansion operations do not affect backups and snapshots.

                    +

                    After the disk data is restored, the disk capacity is increased, but the additional space still needs to be partitioned and formatted before it can be used. You must log in to the server to extend the disk partition or file system.

                    +
                    To extend disk partitions and file systems, see the following sections: +
                    +
                    +
                    + +
                    + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0025.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0025.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..807d4eec --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0025.html @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + +

                    Why Can't I Attach My Disk to a Server?

                    +

                    Symptom

                    My disk cannot be attached to a server.

                    +
                    +

                    Troubleshooting

                    Possible causes are listed here in order of their probability.

                    +

                    If the fault persists after you have ruled out one cause, move on to the next one in the list.

                    + +
                    + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                    Table 1 Troubleshooting

                    Symptom

                    +

                    Solution

                    +

                    The target server on the Attach Disk page could not be found.

                    +
                    +

                    The Attach button is grayed out.

                    +
                    +

                    An incorrect OS type warning is displayed when a shared disk is attached.

                    +

                    Go to Check Whether the Servers Attached with the Shared Disk Are Running the Same Type of OS.

                    +
                    +
                    +
                    +

                    Check Whether the Disk and Server Are in the Same AZ

                    Symptom: After you click Attach, the target server cannot be found on the Attach Disk page.

                    +

                    Solution: A disk can only be attached to a server in the same AZ and region. The Attach Disk page filters and shows all the servers that the disk can be attached to. Determine whether your disk data is required.

                    +
                    • If the disk data is no longer needed, delete the disk, and then create a new disk in the AZ where your target server is located.
                    • If the disk data is still required, create a new disk with the same data in the target AZ. The procedure is as follows:
                      1. Create a backup for the disk.
                        Figure 1 Create Backup
                        +
                      2. Create a new disk from this backup. During the creation, select the target AZ. You can also change the settings of Disk Type and Advanced Settings if needed.
                        Figure 2 Create from backup
                        +
                      3. After the disk is created, click Attach. Your target server is displayed on the Attach Disk page.
                      +
                    +
                    +

                    Maximum Number of Disks That Can Be Attached to the Server Has Been Reached

                    Symptom: The Attach button is grayed out.

                    +

                    Solution:

                    +
                    • Non-shared disk: When you hover the mouse over the Attach button, message "This operation can be performed only when the disk is in the Available state" is displayed.

                      A non-shared disk can only be attached to one server. If the disk status is In-use, the disk has been attached. You can detach the disk, wait until the disk status changes to Available, and then attach the disk to the target server.

                      +
                    +
                    • Shared disk: When you hover the mouse over the Attach button, message "This operation cannot be performed because the maximum number of servers that a shared disk can be attached to has been reached" is displayed.

                      A shared disk can be attached to a maximum of 16 servers, but you can detach the shared disk from one server and attach it to a new one if needed.

                      +
                    +
                    +

                    Check Whether the Disk Has Been Added to a Replication Pair

                    Symptom: The Attach button is grayed out. When you hover the mouse over the Attach button, message "This operation cannot be performed on a disk in a replication pair" is displayed.

                    +

                    Solution: Delete the replication pair and attach the disk again.

                    +
                    1. Choose Storage > Storage Disaster Recovery Service.

                      The Storage Disaster Recovery Service page is displayed.

                      +

                    2. Locate the protection group containing the disk and click the protection group name.

                      The protection group details page is displayed.

                      +

                    3. Click the Replication Pairs tab.

                      Check that the disk in the Production Site Disk column is the target disk.

                      +

                    4. Confirm the information and click Delete in the Operation column.
                    5. After the replication pair is deleted, return to the disk list, and the disk can be attached.
                    +
                    +

                    Check Whether the Servers Attached with the Shared Disk Are Running the Same Type of OS

                    Symptom: After you click Attach, the target server cannot be selected on the Attach Disk page, and message "A shared disk must be attached to servers with the same OS type" is displayed.

                    +

                    Solution: This message indicates that the OS type of the target server is inconsistent with that of the servers attached with the shared disk. You can change the OS type based your service requirements.

                    +
                    +
                    +
                    + +
                    + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0027.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0027.html index ab906350..a6c6bff9 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0027.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0027.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

                    Why Did My Disk Capacity Remain Unchanged on the Server After Capacity Expansion?

                    After expanding disk capacity on the management console, you must log in to the server and extend the disk partition and file system for the extra capacity to become available. Otherwise, you cannot view the additional space on the server.

                    -
                    diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0028.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0028.html index 291e520c..b01a29da 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0028.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0028.html @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@

                    Do I Need to Detach an EVS Disk Before Expanding Its Capacity?

                    -
                    An expansion consists of two phases:
                    1. Expand the disk capacity on the management console.
                      • A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all its servers and then expand its capacity.
                      • A non-shared, in-use disk can be expanded, and you can leave the disk attached during expansion as long as the following conditions are met:
                        • The disk's server is in the Running or Stopped state.
                        • The disk's server OS supports the expansion of In-use disks.
                        +
                        An expansion consists of two phases:
                        1. Expand the disk capacity on the management console.
                          • A shared, in-use disk cannot be expanded. You must detach the shared disk from all its servers and then expand its capacity.
                          • A non-shared, in-use disk can be expanded, and you can leave the disk attached during expansion as long as the following conditions are met:
                            • The disk's server is in the Running or Stopped state.
                            • The disk's server OS supports the expansion of In-use disks.

                              Only some server OSs support capacity expansion of In-use disks. For details, see Expanding Capacity for an In-use EVS Disk.

                              +
                              +
                        2. Log in to the server and create a new partition or allocate the additional space to one that is already there.
                          • In Windows, there are no partition extensions that require the partition to be unmounted first.
                          • In Linux:
                            • When allocating the additional space to an existing partition, that is, extending an existing partition, you must use the umount command to unmount the partition first.
                            • When allocating the additional space to a new partition, that is, creating a new partition, you do not need to unmount the existing partition.
                          diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0029.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0029.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfb82ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0029.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + + +

                          How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to a New Partition?

                          +

                          Windows

                          In Windows, if you already have a D drive and want to add an E drive, refer to the following:

                          +

                          The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (F:) and Data Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (E:) parts in the following section:

                          +

                          Extending Disk Partitions and File Systems (Windows)

                          +
                          +

                          Linux

                          In Linux, if your disk already has, for example, partition /dev/vdb1 and you want to create a new partition, /dev/vdb2, and allocate the additional space to the new partition, refer to the following:

                          + +
                          +
                          +
                          + +
                          + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0030.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0030.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0340b364 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0030.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ + + +

                          How Can I Allocate Newly Added Space to an Existing Partition?

                          +

                          Windows

                          In Windows, if your disk already has, for example, a D: drive and you want to add space to this volume, refer to the following:

                          +

                          The System Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (C:) and Data Disk: Add Additional Capacity to New Volume (D:) parts in the following section:

                          + +
                          +

                          Linux

                          In Linux, if your disk already has, for example, partition /dev/vdb1 and you want to add space to this partition, refer to the following:

                          + +
                          +
                          +
                          + +
                          + diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0032.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0032.html index f5d92579..5426fb05 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0032.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0032.html @@ -1,7 +1,12 @@

                          What Should I Do If My Disk Starts to Run Out of Space?

                          -
                          If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:
                          • Create a new disk and attach it to the server.
                          • Expand the capacity of the existing disk. Both system disks and data disks can be expanded.
                          +
                          If your disk space starts to fill up, you can:
                          1. Create a new disk and attach it to the server. For details, see Create an EVS Disk.
                          2. Expand the capacity of the existing disk. Both system disks and data disks can be expanded. An expansion operation includes two steps:
                            1. Expand the disk capacity on the console.
                            2. Log in to the server and extend the partition and file system.
                            +

                            For details, see Disk Capacity Expansion

                            +
                          +
                          +

                          Differences Between Expanding an EVS Disk and Creating an EVS Disk

                          The differences are as follows:
                          • Expanding an EVS disk is when you expand the capacity of an existing EVS disk. Some systems let you expand the capacity of EVS disks in use. In this case, services are not interrupted.
                          • If you create a new EVS disk and attach it to a server that already has an existing EVS disk, the new EVS disk and the original EVS disk are attached to the same server but independent from each other.
                          +
                          diff --git a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0033.html b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0033.html index 9f1ba89c..e9b7af90 100644 --- a/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0033.html +++ b/docs/evs/umn/evs_faq_0033.html @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ -

                          How Do I Start Using a Newly Purchased Disk?

                          -

                          A newly purchased disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server operating system before you can use it.

                          +

                          How Do I Start Using a Newly Created Disk?

                          +

                          A newly created disk must be attached to a server and then initialized in the server OS before you can use it.

                          +

                          For more information, see Process Overview.